| all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| manual |
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 5.01 MiB | May 10 2012 | |||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 10 2012 | ||||||
| 1 | External Photos | May 10 2012 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | May 10 2012 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | May 10 2012 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | May 10 2012 |
| 1 | User Manual | Users Manual | 5.01 MiB | May 10 2012 |
Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA June 2012 Rosemount 2051 Wireless Series Pressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART Protocol Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Title Page June 2012 Rosemount 2051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure, Flow, and Level Solutions Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product. For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:
Customer Central Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions. United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211 Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390 North American Response Center Equipment service needs. 1-800-654-7768 (24 hoursincludes Canada) Outside of these areas, contact your local Rosemount representative. The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings. For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount Sales Representative. i Title Page June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury:
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation. Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of this manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications. Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. The Rosemount 2051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping. Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U. S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping. Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment. ii Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Contents Table of Contents June 2012 1Section 1: Introduction 1.1 Using This Manual . 1 1.2 Models Covered . 1 1.3 Service Support . 2 1.4 Product Recycling/Disposal . 3 2Section 2: Configuration 2.1 Overview . 5 2.2 Safety Messages . 5 2.2.1 Warnings (). 6 2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. 6 2.3.1 Connection Diagrams . 6 2.4 Device Network Configuration . 7 2.4.1 Join Device to Network . 7 2.4.2 Configure Update Rate . 8 2.4.3 Remove Power Module . 8 2.5 Review Configuration Data. 9 2.5.1 Review Pressure Information . 9 2.5.2 Review Device Information . 9 2.5.3 Review Sensor Information . 11 2.5.4 Review Radio Information . 11 2.6 Field Communicator . 13 2.7 Check Output . 14 2.7.1 Operating Parameters . 14 2.8 Basic Setup . 14 2.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit. 14 2.8.2 Set Transfer Function . 16 2.8.3 Damping. 17 2.8.4 Write Protect . 17 2.9 LCD Display . 18 2.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . 18 2.10Detailed Setup . 19 2.10.1Configure Process Alarms . 19 2.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . 20 2.11Diagnostics and Service . 20 2.11.1Master Reset . 20 Table of Contents iii Table of Contents June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.11.2Join Status . 20 2.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . 21 2.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol. 22 2.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . 22 3Section 3: Installation 3.1 Overview . 25 3.2 Safety Messages . 25 3.2.1 Warnings (). 26 3.3 Considerations . 27 3.3.1 General . 27 3.3.2 Wireless. 27 3.3.3 Mechanical . 27 3.3.4 Environmental . 28 3.4 Installation Procedures . 29 3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. 29 3.4.2 Process Connections . 32 3.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . 34 3.4.4 Grounding . 34 3.4.5 Power Module Installation. 35 3.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . 35 3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . 36 3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. 37 3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. 37 3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. 38 3.5.4 Manifold Operation. 38 4Section 4: Commissioning 4.1 Safety Messages . 43 4.1.1 Warnings (). 43 4.2 Network Status . 44 4.3 Verify Operation . 44 5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance 5.1 Overview . 47 5.2 Calibration . 47 5.2.1 Sensor Trim overview . 48 iv Table of Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table of Contents June 2012 5.2.2 Zero Trim . 49 5.2.3 Sensor Trim . 49 5.2.4 Recall Factory TrimSensor Trim. 50 5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . 50 5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5). 50 5.3 LCD Screen Messages . 53 5.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . 53 5.3.2 Diagnostic button screen sequence . 55 5.3.3 Network diagnostic status screens . 56 5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . 59 6Section 6: Troubleshooting 6.1 Overview . 63 6.2 Safety Messages . 63 6.2.1 Warnings (). 63 6.3 Disassembly Procedures . 67 6.3.1 Remove from Service . 67 6.3.2 Remove Feature Assembly . 68 6.4 Reassembly Procedures . 69 6.4.1 Reassemble the Process Flange . 69 AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data A.1 Specifications . 71 A.2 Performance Specifications . 71 A.3 Functional Specifications . 75 A.3.1 Range and Sensor Limits . 75 A.4 Physical Specifications. 79 A.5 Dimensional Drawings . 83 A.6 Ordering Information . 85 A.6.1 Options (Include with selected model number) . 86 A.6.2 Options (Include with selected model number) . 93 A.6.3 Options (Include with selected model number) . 98 A.6.4 Options (Include with selected model number) . 105 A.6.5 Options (Include with selected model number) . 110 A.6.6 Options (Include with selected model number) . 115 BAppendix B: Product Certifications Table of Contents B.1 Wireless Certifications. 119 v Table of Contents June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA B.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations. 119 B.1.2 European directive information . 119 B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . 119 B.1.4 FCC and IC. 119 B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . 119 B.1.6 North American certifications. 120 B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . 120 B.1.8 European certifications . 120 B.1.9 Japanese Certifications. 121 B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . 121 vi Table of Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Section 1 Introduction Using This Manual . page 1 Models Covered . page 1 Service Support . page 2 Product Recycling/Disposal . page 3 1.1 Using This Manual The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the Rosemount 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART protocol. The sections are organized as follows:
Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 2051 Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included. Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions. Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device. Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance techniques. Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems. Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information. Appendix B: Product Certifications contains approval information. 1.2 Models Covered The following Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:
Rosemount 2051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter Measures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar). Rosemount 2051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter Measures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar). Introduction 1 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Rosemount 2051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter Measures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar). Rosemount 2051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter Measures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar). Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Provides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide variety of tank configurations. 1.3 Service Support To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative. Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials. The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed. Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. If the product being returned was exposed to a hazardous substance as defined by OSHA, a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for each hazardous substance identified must be included with the returned goods. Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping. Primary lithium batteries (charged or discharged) are regulated in transportation by the U. S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping. 2 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 The Power Module contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged. Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage temperature should not exceed 30 C. Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances. 1.4 Product Recycling/Disposal Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations. Introduction 3 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 4 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Section 2 Configuration Overview . page 5 Safety Messages . page 5 Required Bench Top Configuration . page 6 Device Network Configuration . page 7 Review Configuration Data . page 9 Field Communicator . page 13 Check Output . page 14 Basic Setup . page 14 LCD Display . page 18 Detailed Setup . page 19 Diagnostics and Service . page 20 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . page 22 2.1 Overview This section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed prior to installation. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled Fast Keys for each software function below the appropriate headings. Example Software Function Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, etc. 2.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Configuration 5 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.2.1 Warnings (
) Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm from all persons. 2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration Bench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled COMM on the terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 7. Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter configuration data. 2051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly. When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the transmitter by using the Send key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when the Apply button is clicked. AMS Wireless Configurator AMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right click and select Configure. 2.3.1 Connection Diagrams Bench Hook-up Connect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1, and turn on the Field Communicator by pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS will search for a HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field Communicator or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer to Section 6:
Troubleshooting. 6 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Field Hook-up Figure 2-1 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS may be connected at COMM on the transmitter terminal block. Figure 2-1. Field Communicator Connection 2.4 2.4.1 For HART communication, a 2051 WirelessHART DD is required. Device Network Configuration Join Device to Network Fast Keys 2, 1, 1 In order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system. 1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 1: Join Device to Network. Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server. Configuration 7 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.4.2 Configure Update Rate Fast Keys 2, 1, 2 The Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60 minutes. 1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 2: Configure Update Rate. When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal. 2.4.3 Remove Power Module After the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be commissioned. Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 20 ft. 8 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.5 Review Configuration Data The following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration information. Note Information and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are connected, powered, and operating correctly. 2.5.1 Review Pressure Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 2 To view pressure information:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Unit Transfer Function Damping Upper Range Value Lower Range Value Maximum Minimum Minimum Span 2.5.2 Review Device Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 3 To view device information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 3: Device. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 2 Manufacturer Model Configuration 9 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Final Assembly Number Universal Field Device Software Hardware Descriptor Message Date Model Number I Model Number II Model Number III SI Unit Restriction Country Device ID 10 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.5.3 Review Sensor Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 4 To view sensor information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 4: Sensor. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Measurement Type Module Type Module Serial Number Sensor Materials Isolator Material Fill Fluid Process Connector Connector Type Connector Material O Ring Material Drain Vent Material Remote Seal Number of Seals Seal Type Diaphragm Material Seal Fill Fluid 2.5.4 Review Radio Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 5 To view radio information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 5: Radio. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 Manufacturer Configuration 11 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2 3 4 5 Device Type Device Revision Software Revision Hardware Revision 12 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.6 Field Communicator 1. Active Alerts 2. Communication Status 3. Pressure 4. Pressure Status 5. Last Update Time 1. Join Device to Network 2. Configure Update Rate 3. Zero Trim 4. Configure Device Display 5. Configure Process Alarms 6. Basic Setup 1. Network ID 2. Join Device to Network 3. Broadcast Rates 4. Configure Broadcast Power Level 5. Power Mode 6. Power Source 1. Overview 2. Configure 3. Service Tools 1. Guided Setup 2. Manual Setup 3. Alert Setup 1. HI-HI Alarm 2. HI Alarm 3. LO Alarm 4. LO-LO Alarm 1. Wireless 2. Pressure 3. Device Temperatures 4. Device Information 5. Device Display 6. Other 1. Configure LO-LO Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure HI-HI Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure LO Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure HI Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Alerts 2. Variables 3. Communications 4. Routine Maintenance 5. Simulate 1. Join Status 2. Communication Status 3. Join Mode 4. Number of Available Neighbors 5. Number of Advertisements Heard 6. Number of Join Attempts 1. Sensor Calibration 2. Other 1. Pressure 2. Sensor Temperature 3. Electronics Temperature 4. Supply Voltage 1. Sensor Temperature 2. Electronics Temperature 1. Unit 2. Maximum 3. Minimum 1. Tag 2. Long Tag 3. Device 4. Sensor 5. Radio 6. Write Protect 1. Mode 2. Display Options 1. Measurement and Status Log 1. Active Alerts 2. History 1. Percent of Range 2. Pressure 3. Pressure Status 4. Sensor Temperature 5. Sensor Temperature Status 6. Electronics Temperature 7. Electronics Temp Status 8. Supply Voltage 9. Supply Voltage Status 10. Last Update Time 1. Current Lower Trim 2. Current Upper Trim 3. Zero Sensor Trim 4. Lower Sensor Trim 5. Upper Sensor Trim 6. Recall Factory Trim 1. Master Reset 2. Measurement History 3. Advertise to New Devices 1. Configure Update Rate 2. Message 1 3. Message 2 1. Unit 2. Transfer Function 3. Damping 4. Upper Range Value 5. Lower Range Value 6. Maximum 7. Minimum 8. Minimum Span 9. Range Using Applied Value 1. Manufacturer 2. Model 3. Final Assembly Number 4. Universal 5. Field Device 6. Software 7. Hardware 8. Descriptor 9. Message 10. Date 11. Model Number I 12. Model Number II 13. Model Number III 14. SI Unit Restriction 15. Country 16. Device ID 1. Measurement Type 2. Module Type 3. Module Serial Number 4. Sensor Materials 5. Process Connector 6. Remote Seal 1. Number of Seals 2. Seal Type 3. Diaphragm Material 4. Seal Fill Fluid 1. Connector Type 2. Connector Material 3. O Ring Material 4. Drain Vent Material 1. Isolator Fluid 2. Fill Fluid 1. Manufacturer 2. Device Type 3. Device Revision 4. Software Revision 5. Hardware Revision Configuration 13 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.7 Check Output Before performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating properly by checking the operating parameters. 2.7.1 Operating Parameters Fast Keys 3, 2 The pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a Range 2 2051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of 150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi. To view the Operating Parameters menu:
1. 2. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 2: Variables. The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:
Percent of Range Pressure Pressure Status Sensor Temperature Sensor Temperature Status Electronics Temperature Electronics Temperature Status Supply Voltage Supply Voltage Status Last Update Time 2.8 2.8.1 Basic Setup Set Process Variable Unit Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 1 The PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using the appropriate units of measure. To select a unit of measure for the PV:
14 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:
inH2O inHg ftH2O mmH2O mmHg psi bar mbar g/cm2 kg/cm2 Pa kPa torr atm MPa inH2O at 4 C mmH2O at 4 C Configuration 15 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.8.2 Set Transfer Function Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 2 The 2051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 2051 Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable output near zero (see Figure 2-2). From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point. To select the output transfer function:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root. Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition Point Full Scale Flow (%) Sq. Root Curve Transition Point Slope=42 Slope=1 Sq. Root Curve Transition Point Linear Section 16 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.8.3 Damping Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 3 The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly. Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds. To determine the current damping value:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 3: Damping. 2.8.4 Write Protect Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 6 The 2051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature. The view write protect security settings:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 6: Write Protect. Configuration 17 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.9 2.9.1 LCD Display LCD Display Configuration Fast Keys 2, 1, 4 The LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. Note Use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002. The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays Error when the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph represents the network connectivity status. See LCD Screen Messages on page 53 for more information on LCD messages. To configure LCD display options:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 4: Configure Device Display. 18 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.10 Detailed Setup 2.10.1 Configure Process Alarms Fast Keys 2, 1, 5 Alerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset once the value returns within range. Note HI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the pressure or temperature sensor limits. Example 1: Rising Alert t n e m e r u s a e M f o s t i n U Alert OFF Alert ON Alert OFF Deadband Time Alert Set Point Assigned Value Example 2: Falling Alert t n e m e r u s a e M f o s t i n U Alert OFF Alert ON Alert OFF Assigned Value Alert Set Point Deadband Time To configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete configure of process alarms. Configuration 19 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.10.2 Sensor Temperature Unit Fast Keys 2, 2, 3, 1, 1 The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only. To select the sensor temperature unit:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 3: Device Temperatures. Select 1: Sensor Temperature. Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit. 2.11 Diagnostics and Service Diagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can be performed either on the bench or in the field. 2.11.1 Master Reset Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 1 The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 4: Routine Maintenance. Select 2: Other. Select 1: Master Reset. 2.11.2 Join Status Fast Keys 3, 3, 1 To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 3: Communications. Select 1: Join Status. 20 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Wireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:
Step 1. Network Found Step 2. Network Security Clearance Granted Step 3. Network Bandwidth Allocated Step 4. Network Join Complete 2.11.3 Number of Available Neighbors Fast Keys 3, 3, 4 In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 3: Routine Maintenance. Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors. Configuration 21 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 2.12 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol 2.12.1 Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data Fast Keys left arrow, 1, 2 Use the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS User Configuration feature to configure several 2051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no. 00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:
Field Communicator 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Completely configure the first transmitter. Save the configuration data:
Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen. a. b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not, select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE. Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag number. d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD, select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD. Select F2 SAVE. c. e. Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator. Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu appears. Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE CONTENTS menu. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration. Select 1: Edit. Select 1: Mark All. Select F2 SAVE. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again. Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter. Select OK after the control loop is set to manual. After the configuration has been sent, select OK. 22 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 When finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to configure another transmitter. Note The transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the original transmitter. AMS creating a Reusable Copy To create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Completely configure the first transmitter. Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar button). In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu. In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK. The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter. Note A device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window. The Compare Configurations window appears, showing the Current values of the copied device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side. 6. 7. Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate or enter values by typing them into the available fields. Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window. AMS Applying a User Configuration Any amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved, and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database. To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window. Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other. Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click OK to apply the configuration and close the window. Configuration 23 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 24 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Section 3 Installation Overview . page 25 Safety Messages . page 25 Considerations . page 27 Installation Procedures . page 29 Installing the LCD Display . page 35 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . page 36 3.1 Overview The information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide
(document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 2051 Wireless variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled Fast Keys for each software function below the appropriate headings. 3.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated with a warning symbol (
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
). Refer to the following safety messages before Installation 25 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 3.2.1 Warnings (
) Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury. Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation. Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 2051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service. Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the instrument dangerous. Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts. Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule. For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing. The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. 26 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3.3 3.3.1 Considerations General Measurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation. 3.3.2 Wireless Power Up Sequence The Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420). Field Communicator Connections In order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 2051, the Power Module must be connected. Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections 3.3.3 Mechanical Note For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement. Note When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 32, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service. Installation 27 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 3.3.4 Environmental Access requirements and cover installation on page 29 can help optimize transmitter performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration, mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A:
Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits. Figure 3-2. Installation Flowchart START HERE Bench Calibration?
No Yes Configure
(Section 2) Set Units Set Range Points Set Network Parameters Verify Review Transmitter Configuration
(page 7) Apply Pressure Within Specifications?
Yes No Refer to Section 4 Operation and Maintenance Field Install Check Switches
(page 34) Mount Transmitter
(page 29) Install Power
(pages 3534) Module Check Process Connection
(page 32) Confirm Transmitter Configuration
(page 7) Trim Transmitter for Mounting
(page 48) Effects Done 28 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3.4 Installation Procedures For dimensional drawing information refer to Dimensional Drawings on page 83. Process Flange Orientation Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input. Housing Rotation See Consider Housing Rotation on page 34. Power Module Side of Electronics Housing Mount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is required for cover removal. Circuit Side of Electronics Housing Provide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed. Cover Installation Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings. 3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter Mounting Brackets Facilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. Coplanar Flange Mounting Configura-
tions on page 83 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option. Options B1B3 and B7B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with the traditional flange. The B1B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7B9 brackets have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style brackets support panel mounting. Note Most transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to Sensor Trim on page 49. Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down as well.) Installation 29 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Flange Bolts The 2051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:
B7M Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings 316 B8M 660 CL A F593_ F593_ Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings
* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M. KM Alloy K-500 Head Marking Bolt Installation Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 2051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1. 2. 3. Finger-tighten the bolts. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern. Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:
Table 3-1. Bolt Installation Torque Values Bolt Material Initial Torque Value CS-ASTM-A445 Standard 316 SSTOption L4 ASTM-A-193-B7MOption L5 Alloy K-500Option L6 ASTM-A-453-660Option L7 ASTM-A-193-B8MOption L8 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) Final Torque Value 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 30 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Impulse Piping The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss
(particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs. The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping:
Keep impulse piping as short as possible. For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection. For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection. Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines. Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature. Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage. Vent all gas from liquid piping legs. When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level. When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter. Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 F [121 C]) process material out of direct contact with the SuperModule and flanges. Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping. Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping. Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange. Installation 31 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3 5.3.1 LCD Screen Messages Startup Screen Sequence The following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount 2051 Wireless. X X X X X X X X X x x x x x x x x x All Segments On: used to visually determine if there are any bad segments on the LCD 3 0 5 1 W I r e l s Device Identification: used to determine Device Type. A b c d e f g h Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank P R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I PV Screen - process pressure Operation and Maintenance 53 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA S N S R 2 5. 0 0 d e g c SV Screen - sensor temperature value D E V 2 5. 2 5 d e g c TV Screen - device temperature value S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s P R C N T 7. 2 1 R A N G E a l e r t p r e s n t QV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminals Percent Range Screen - percent range reading Alert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are present 54 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3.2 Diagnostic button screen sequence The following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic Button has been pressed. A b c d e f g h Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank i d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Device Identification: used to determine Device ID n e t w k 13 0 5 I D Diagnostic Button Screen 3:
assuming the device has the correct join key, this ID tells the user what network the device can connect with n e t w k O K Diagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parents Operation and Maintenance 55 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s Diagnostic Button Screen 5:
voltage reading at the power supply terminals 5.3.3 Network diagnostic status screens These screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the startup sequence or diagnostic sequence. n e t w k u n k n w n Diagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is attempting to start the radio n e t w k I N I T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just restarted n e t w k i d l e Diagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting to join the process 56 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 n e t w k D I S C N T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a disconnected state and requires a Force Join command to join the network N E T w K S R C H N G Diagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is searching for the Network n e t w k N E G O T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is attempting to join a network n e t w k c o n e c t Diagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is connected to the Network, but is in a Quarantined state Diagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined and operational, but is running with limited bandwidth for sending periodic data n e t w k L I M - O P Operation and Maintenance 57 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA n e t w k O K Diagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parents 58 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens The following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device. D E V f A i l u r Device Information - Status: there is a critical error which may prevent the device from operating correctly. Check additional status screens for more information. P R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I PV Screen - process pressure value S N S R 2 5. 0 0 d e g c SV Screen - sensor temperature value D E V 2 5. 2 5 d e g c TV Screen - device temperature value Operation and Maintenance 59 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s P R C N T 7. 2 1 R A N G E a l e r t p r e s n t QV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminals Percent Range Screen - percent range reading Alert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are present A b c d e f g h Diagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag:
user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank i d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Diagnostic Button Screen 2: the devices identifier that is used to make up the HART long address -
the Smart Wireless Gateway may use this to help identify devices if no unique user tag is available 60 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 s u p l y f a i l u r s u p l y l o w r a d i o f a i l u r c o n f g f a i l u r Diagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the terminal voltage has dropped below level of operating limit. Replace the Power Module
(Part Number: 701PGNKF) Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the terminal voltage is below the recommended operating range -
if this is a battery operated device, the Power Module should be replaced - for line powered devices, the supply voltage should be increased Diagnostic Button Screen 8: the device may not be able to communicate with the radio or the radio has an internal error. In this state the device may still be operational and publishing HART data Diagnostic Button Screen 9.1:
configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that critical operation of the device may be affected -
check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be corrected Operation and Maintenance 61 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA c o n f g w a r n s n s r f a i l u r s n s r w a r n Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2:
configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that non-critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be corrected Diagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a sensor attached to the transmitter has failed, and valid readings from that sensor are no longer possible - check the sensor and sensor wiring connections -
check additional status for more detailed information of the failure source Diagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a sensor attached to the transmitter is degraded, readings from that sensor may not be within accuracy specifications -
check the process, and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the warning source Note Use the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002. 62 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Overview . page 63 Safety Messages . page 63 Disassembly Procedures . page 67 Reassembly Procedures . page 69 6.1 Overview Table 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, follow the procedures described here to verify that transmitter hardware and process connections are in good working order. Always deal with the most likely checkpoints first. 6.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. 6.2.1 Warnings (
) Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure that the instruments are installed according to intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices. Static electricity can damage sensitive components. Observe safe handling precautions for static-sensitive components. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service. Troubleshooting 63 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table 6-1. Rosemount 2051 Wireless Device Status Information Device Status Description Recommended Action Electronics Failure An electronics error that could impact the device measement reading has occurred. Radio Failure The wireless radio has detected a failure or stopped communicating. Supply Voltage Failure The supply voltage is too low for the device to function properly. Electronics Warning The device has detected an electronics error that does not currently impact the device measurement reading. Pressure has Exceeded Limits The sensor has exceeded the maximum measurement range. Electronics Temperature has Exceeded Limits The electronics temperature has exceeded the transmitter's maximum range. Supply Voltage Low Database Memory Warning The supply voltage is low and may soon affect broadcast updates. The device has failed to write to the database memory. Any data written during this time may have been lost. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Replace the Power Module Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Check process for possible saturation condition Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the application Reconfirm sensor configuration Reset the device Replace the sensor Verify environmental temperature is within the transmitters range Remote mount the transmitter away from process and environmental conditions Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Replace the Power Module Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory can be safely ignored If the condition persists, replace the electronics 64 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Device Status Description Recommended Action Configuration Error The device has detected a configuration error based on a change to the device. HI HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. LO LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. Button Stuck A buttons on the Electronics Board is detected as stuck in the active position. Simulation Active The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Click on details for more information Correct the parameter that has a configuration error Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Check the buttons for obstructions Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Verify that simulation is no longer required Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools Reset the device Troubleshooting 65 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table 6-2. Rosemount 2051 Wireless Troubleshooting Symptom Transmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic LCD display is not functioning Recommended Actions Check test equipment Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage Verify applied pressure is within sensor limits Check test equipment (verify accuracy) Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg Verify transmitter is calibrated properly Verify pressure calculations for application Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off Reseat the LCD according to Installing the LCD Display on page 35 Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002 Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled. Symptom Device not joining the network Table 6-3. Wireless Network Troubleshooting Recommended Actions Verify network ID and join key Wait longer (30 min.) Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless Gateway Check Power Module Verify device is within range of at least one other device Verify network is in active network advertise Power Cycle device to try again Verify device is configured to join. Send the Force Join command to the device See troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more information Check that Power Always On mode is off Verify device is not installed in extreme temperatures Verfiy that device is not a network pinch point Check for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivity Reduce the Update Rate on transmitter Increase communication paths by adding more wireless points Check that device has been online for at least an hour Check that device is not routing through a limited routing node Create a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway Short battery life Limited Bandwidth Error 66 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 6.3 6.3.1 Disassembly Procedures Remove from Service Be aware of the following:
Follow all plant safety rules and procedures. Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service. Detach the process flange by removing the four flange bolts and two alignment screws that secure it. Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms. Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water. Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the Teflon o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If they are not damaged, reuse them. The 2051 Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation. The 2051 Wireless In-line transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process. Troubleshooting 67 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 6.3.2 Remove Feature Assembly The Wireless Feature Board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the assembly, perform the following procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side. Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly. Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly. Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the SuperModule connector and antenna connector. Grasp antenna connector by the base and pull upwards to disconnect. Grasp the SuperModule connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards
(avoid pulling wires). Figure 6-1. Sensor module connector view Wireless Housing 68 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 6.4 Reassembly Procedures important The V-Seal must be installed at the bottom of the housing. 6.4.1 Reassemble the Process Flange 1. Inspect the Teflon sensor module o-rings. If the o-rings are not damaged, reuse them. Replace o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear. Note If you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings. 2. 3. Install the process flange on the sensor module. To hold the process flange in place, install the two alignment screws to finger tight (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten; this will affect module-to-flange alignment. Install the appropriate flange bolts. a. b. c. If the installation requires a 1/418 NPT mounting, use four 1.75-in. flange bolts. Go to Step f. If the installation requires a 1/214 NPT mounting, use four 2.88-in. process flange/adapter bolts. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-in. bolts and two 1.75-in. bolts. Go to Step d. If the installation uses a manifold (differential pressure applications only), use appropriate bolts. Go to Step e. d. Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while finger-tightening the bolts. Go to Step g. e. Align the process flange with the manifold. f. g. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for Finger tighten the bolts. appropriate torque values. h. Tighten the bolts to the final torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 for appropriate torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing. If the installation uses a manifold, then install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter. i. Troubleshooting 69 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table 6-4. Bolt Installation Torque Values Bolt Material Initial Torque Value Final Torque Value CS-ASTM-A445 Standard 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m) 316 SSTOption L4 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) ASTM-A-193-B7MOption 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m) L5 Alloy K-500Option L6 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m) ASTM-A-453-660Option 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) L7 ASTM-A-193-B8MOption 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) L8 4. 5. If you replaced the Teflon sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Install the drain/vent valve. a. Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply two clockwise turns of sealing tape. b. Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the ground and away from human contact when the valve is opened. c. Tighten the drain/vent valve to 250 in-lb. (28.25 N-m). Note After replacing o-rings on Range 1 transmitters and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 F (85 C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 F (85 C) for two hours before calibration. 70 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A Specifications and Reference Data Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Performance Specifications . page 71 Functional Specifications . page 75 Physical Specifications . page 79 Dimensional Drawings . page 83 Ordering Information . page 85 A.1 A.2 Specifications Performance Specifications For zero-based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, glass-filled PTFE o-rings, SST materials, Coplanar flange (2051C) or 1/2 in.- 14 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points. Conformance to specification (3 (Sigma)) Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques and statistical process control ensure specification conformance to 3or better. Digital Output For wireless devices, use calibrated range in place of span. Specifications and Reference Data 71 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Reference Accuracy(1) Models(1) Standard High Accuracy Option 2051CD, 2051CG Range 0 (CD) 0.10% of span For spans less than 2:1, accuracy = 0.05% of URL Range 1 0.10% of span For spans less than 15:1, accuracy =
0.025 0.005
URL
% of Span
Span Ranges 2-5 0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
0.015 0.005
URL
% of Span
Span 2051T Ranges 1-4 0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
0.0075 URL
% of Span
Span Range 5 0.075% of span 2051CA Ranges 1-4 0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
0.0075 URL
% of Span
Span 2051H/2051L All Ranges 0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =
0.025 0.005
URL
% of Span
Span Ranges 2-4 High Accuracy Option, P8 0.04% of span For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
0.015 0.005
URL
% of Span
Span Ranges 1-4 High Accuracy Option, P8 0.04% of span For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
0.0075 URL
% of Span
Span Ranges 2-4 High Accuracy Option, P8 0.04% of span For spans less than 5:1, accuracy =
0.0075 URL
% of Span
Span
(1) Total performance is determined by performing a root sum square calculation on reference accuracy, ambient temperature effect, and line pressure effect errors. For FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitters, use calibrated range in place of span. For zero based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, SST materials, Coplanar flange
(2051C) or 1/2 in. - 18 NPT (2051T) process connections, digital trim values set to equal range points. Total Performance For 50 F (28 C) temperature changes, up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure (CD only), from 1:1 to 5:1 rangedown. Total Performance Ranges 2-5 0.15% of span Ranges 1-4 0.15% of span Models 2051C 2051T 72 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Models 2051C Long Term Stability Long Term Stability Ranges 2-5 0.125% of URL for 5 years 50 F (28 C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure. 2051CD Low/Draft Range Ranges 0-1 0.2% of URL for 1 year 2051T Ranges 1-4 0.125% of URL for 5 years 50 F (28 C) temperature changes, and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure. Dynamic Performance Total Response Time (Td + Tc)(2):
2051C, Ranges 2-5:
Range 1:
Range 0:
2051T:
2051H/L:
Dead Time (Td) Update Rate 4 - 20 mA
(HART protocol)(1) Fieldbus protocol(3) 100 ms 255 ms 700 ms 100 ms Consult factory 152 ms 307 ms 752 ms 152 ms Consult factory 45 ms (nominal) 97 ms 22 times per second 22 times per second
(1) Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only
(2) Nominal total response time at 75 F (24 C) reference conditions.
(3) Transmitter fieldbus output only, segment macro-cycle not included. Typical HART Transmitter Response Time Transmitter Output vs. Time Pressure Released 100%
36.8%
0%
Td Tc Td = Dead Time Tc = Time Constant Response Time = Td+Tc 63.2% of Total Step Change Time Line Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa)(1) Models(1) 2051CD Range 0 Line Pressure Effect Zero Error(2) 0.125% of URL/100 psi (6,89 bar) Range 1 0.25% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) Ranges 2-3 0.05% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa) Range 0 Span Error 0.15% of reading/100 psi (6,89 bar) Range 1 0.4% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar) 2051HD Ranges 2-3 All Ranges All Ranges 0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar) Zero Error(1) 0.1% of URL/1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa) Span Error 0.1% of reading/1000 psi (68,9 bar)
(1) For zero error specifications for line pressures above 2000 psi (137,9 bar) or line pressure effect specifications for DP Ranges 4-5, see Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5) on page 50.
(2) Can be calibrated out at line pressure. Specifications and Reference Data 73 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Ambient Temperature Effect per 50F (28C) Models 2051CD/CG 2051T 2051CA 2051L Models 2051C 2051L Ambient Temperature Effect Range 0
(0.25% URL + 0.05% span) Range 1
(0.1% URL + 0.25% span) Ranges 2-5
(0.0125% URL + 0.0625% span) from 1:1 to 5:1
(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 5:1 to 100:1 Range 1
(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 10:1
(0.05% URL + 0.125% span) from 10:1 to 100:1 Range 2-4
(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1 Range 5
(0.1% URL + 0.15% span) All Ranges
(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 30:1
(0.035% URL + 0.125% span) from 30:1 to 100:1 See Rosemount Inc. Instrument Toolkit software. Mounting Position Effects Mounting Position Effects Zero shifts up to 1.25 inH2O (3,11 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect. With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2,49 mbar). With diaphragm in horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12,43 mbar) plus extension length on extended units. All zero shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect. 2051T/CA Zero shifts up to 2.5 inH2O (6,22 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect. Vibration Effect Less than 0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1 field or pipeline with high vibration level (10-60 Hz 0.21mm displacement peak amplitude / 60-2000 Hz 3g). Power Supply Effect Less than 0.005% of calibrated span per volt. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR NE-21. Transient Protection (Option Code T1) Meets IEEE C62.41, Category Location B 6 kV crest (0.5 s - 100 kHz) 3 kV crest (8 20 microseconds) 6 kV crest (1.2 50 microseconds) 74 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 A.3 A.3.1 Functional Specifications Range and Sensor Limits Table A-1. 2051CD, 2051CG, 2051L, and 2051H Range and Sensor Limits Minimum Span Range and Sensor Limits e g n a R 0 1 2 3 4 5 2051CD(1), CG, L, H 0.1 inH2O
(0,25 mbar) 0.5 inH2O
(1,2 mbar) 2.5 inH2O
(6,2 mbar) 10 inH2O
(24,9 mbar) 3 psi
(0,20 bar) 20 psi
(1,38 bar) Upper
(URL) 3.0 inH2O
(7,47 mbar) 25 inH2O
(62,3 mbar) 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 1000 inH2O
(2,49 bar) 300 psi
(20,6 bar) 2000 psi
(137,9 bar) 2051C Differential 3.0 inH2O
(-7,47 mbar) 25 inH2O
(62,1 mbar) 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 1000 inH2O
(2,49 bar) 300 psi
(20,6 bar) 2000 psi
(137,9 bar) 2051C/
Gage NA 25 inH2O
(62,1 mbar) 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs)
(34,5 mbar abs) 0.5 psia 0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs) Lower (LRL) 2051L Differential NA NA 2051L Gage NA NA 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 1000 inH2O
(2,49 bar) 300 psi
(20,6 bar) NA 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs) 0.5 psia
(34,5 mbar abs) NA 2051H Differential NA NA 250 inH2O
(0,62 bar) 1000 inH2O
(2,49 bar) 300 psi
(20,6 bar) 2000 psi
(137,9 bar)
(1) Range 0 only available with 2051CD. Range 1 only available with 2051CD or 2051CG. Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements
(HART and Low Power) Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-1. Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-1. Service Liquid, gas, and vapor applications 420 mA (Output Code A) Output Two-wire 420 mA, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on 420 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to the HART protocol. Power Supply External power supply required. Standard transmitter (420 mA) operates on 10.5 to 55 V dc with no load. Specifications and Reference Data 75 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Load Limitations Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as described by:
Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage 10.5)
) s m h O
d a o L Operating Region Voltage (V dc) Communication requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms.
(1) For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V. Wireless Self-Organizing Networks Output WirelessHART, 2.4 GHz DSSS. Local Display The optional five-digit LCD can display user-selectable information such as primary variable in engineering units, percent of range, sensor module temperature, and electronics temperature. Display updates at up to once per minute. Update Rate User selectable, 1 sec. to 60 min. Wireless Power Module Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF) with polybutadine terephthalate (PBT) enclosure. Ten-year life at one minute update rate.(1)
(1) Reference conditions are 70 F (21 C), and routing data for three additional network devices. NOTE: Continuous exposure to ambient temperature limits of
-40 F or 185 F (-40 C or 85 C) may reduce specified life by less than 20 percent. Overpressure Limits Transmitters withstand the following limits without damage:
76 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Rosemount 2051CD/CG Range 0: 750 psi (51,7 bar) Range 1: 2000 psig (137,9 bar) Ranges 25: 3626 psig (250 bar) 4500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9 Rosemount 2051CA Range 1: 750 psia (51,7 bar) Range 2: 1500 psia (103,4 bar) Range 3: 1600 psia (110,3 bar) Range 4: 6000 psia (413,7 bar) Rosemount 2051H All Ranges: 3626 psig (25 MPa) Rosemount 2051TG/TA Range 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar) Range 2: 1500 psi (103,4 bar) Range 3: 1600 psi (110,3 bar) Range 4: 6000 psi (413,7 bar) Range 5: 15000 psi (1034,2 bar) Rosemount 2051L Limit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower (see the table below). Standard ANSI/ASME ANSI/ASME ANSI/ASME Type Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 CS Rating 285 psig 740 psig 1480 psig SST Rating 275 psig 720 psig 1440 psig At 100 F (38 C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5. DIN DIN DIN PN 1040 PN 10/16 PN 25/40 40 bar 16 bar 40 bar 40 bar 16 bar 40 bar At 248 F (120 C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401. Static Pressure Limit Rosemount 2051CD Only Operates within specifications between static line pressures of 0.5 psia and 3626 psig (4500 psig
(310, 3 bar) for Option Code P9). Range 0: 0.5 psia and 750 psig (3, 4 bar and 51, 7 bar) Range 1: 0.5 psia and 2000 psig (3, 4 bar and 137, 9 bar) Specifications and Reference Data 77 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Burst Pressure Limits Coplanar or traditional process flange 10000 psig (689,5 bar). 2051T:
Ranges 14: 11000 psi (758,4 bar) Range 5: 26000 psig (1792,64 bar) Temperature Limits Ambient 40 to 185 F (40 to 85 C) With LCD display(1): 40 to 175 F (40 to 80 C) LCD display may not be readable and LCD updates will be slower at temperatures below -4 F (-20 C).
(1) Storage 40 to 185 F (40 to 85 C) With LCD display: 40 to 185 F (40 to 85 C) Process Temperature Limits At atmospheric pressures and above. Silicone Fill Sensor(1) with Coplanar Flange with Traditional Flange with Level Flange with 305 Integral Manifold 2051C Coplanar 40 to 250 F (40 to 121 C)(2) 40 to 300 F (40 to 149 C)(2)(3) 40 to 300 F (40 to 149 C)(2) 40 to 300 F (40 to 149 C)(2)(3) Inert Fill Sensor(1) Silicone Fill Sensor(1) Inert Fill Sensor(1)
-40 to 185 F (40 to 85 C)(4) (5) 2051T In-Line (Process Fill Fluid) 40 to 250 F (40 to 121 C)(2) 22 to 250 F (30 to 121 C)(2) 2051L Low-Side Temperature Limits Silicone Fill Sensor(1) Inert Fill Sensor(1) 40 to 250 F (40 to 121 C)(2) 0 to 185 F (18 to 85 C)(2) 2051L High-Side Temperature Limits Syltherm XLT D. C. Silicone 704(6) D. C. Silicone 200 Inert (Halocarbon) Glycerin and Water Neobee M-20
(Process Fill Fluid) 102 to 302 F (75 to 150 C) 32 to 400 F (0 to 205 C) 49 to 400 F (45 to 205 C) 49 to 320 F (45 to 160 C) 5 to 203 F (15 to 95 C) 5 to 400 F (15 to 205 C) 78 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 2051C Coplanar 5 to 203 F (15 to 95 C) Propylene Glycol and Water
(1) Process temperatures above 185 F (85 C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio.
(2) 220 F (104 C) limit in vacuum service; 130 F (54 C) for pressures below 0.5 psia.
(3)
(4) 160 F (71 C) limit in vacuum service.
(5) Not available for 2051_CA.
(6) Upper limit of 600 F (315 C) is available with 1199 seal assemblies mounted away from the transmitter
-20 F (-29 C) is the lower process temperature limit with option code P0. with the use of capillaries and up to 500 F (260 C) with direct mount extension. Humidity Limits 0100% relative humidity Volumetric Displacement Less than 0.005 in3 (0,08 cm3) Damping The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 2051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly. A.4 Physical Specifications Electrical Connections 1/214 NPT, G1/2, and M20 x 1.5 (CM20) conduit. HART interface connections fixed to terminal block. Process Connections 2051C 1/418 NPT on 21/8-in. centers 1/214 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in. (50.8 mm), 21/8-in. (54.0 mm), or 21/4-in. (57.2 mm) centers
(process adapters) 2051T 1/214 NPT female, Non-Threaded instrument flange (available in SST for Range 14 transmitters only), G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male (available in SST for Range 14 transmitters only), or Autoclave type F-250-C (Pressure relieved 9/1618 gland thread; 1/4 OD high pressure tube 60 cone; available in SST for Range 5 transmitters only). Specifications and Reference Data 79 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 2051L Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA High pressure side: 2-in.(50.8mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102mm), ASME B 16.5 (ANSI) Class 150, 300 or 600 flange; 50, 80 or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flange Low pressure side: 1/418 NPT on flange, 1/214 NPT on process adapter Process-Wetted Parts Process Isolating Diaphragms G C
D C 1 5 0 2 T 1 5 0 2 A C 1 5 0 2 H 1 5 0 2 Isolating Diaphragm Material 316L SST Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent Valves 316 SST, Alloy C-276, or Alloy 400/K-500 material
(Alloy 400/K-500 is not available with 2051L). Process Flanges and Adapters Plated carbon steel SST: CF-8M (Cast 316 SST) per ASTM A743 Cast C-276: CW-12MW per ASTM A494 Cast Alloy 400: M-30C per ASTM A494 Wetted O-rings Glass-filled PTFE
(Graphite-filled PTFE with Isolating Diaphragm code 6) 2051L Process Wetted Parts Flanged Process Connection (Transmitter High Side) Process Diaphragms, Including Process Gasket Surface 316L SST, Alloy C-276, or Tantalum Extension CF-3M (Cast 316L SST, material per ASTM A743), or CW-12MW (Cast C-276, material ASTM A494); fits schedule 40 and 80 pipe Mounting Flange Zinc-cobalt plated CS or 316 SST 80 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Process Connection (Transmitter Low Side) Isolating Diaphragms 316L SST or Alloy C-276 Reference Flange and Adapter CF-8M (Cast version of 316 SST, material per ASTM-A743) Non-Wetted Parts Electronics Housing Low-copper aluminum alloy or SST: CF-3M (Cast 316L SST) or CF-8M (Cast 316 SST) NEMA 4X, IP66/68 Coplanar Sensor Module Housing CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST) Bolts Plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1 Austenitic 316 SST per ASTM F593 ASTM A453, Class D, Grade 660 SST ASTM A193, Grade B7M alloy steel ASTM A193, Class 2, Grade B8M SST Alloy K-500 Sensor Module Fill Fluid Silicone or inert halocarbon (Inert is not available with 2051CA). In-Line series uses Fluorinert FC-43. Process Fill Fluid (Liquid Level Only) 2051L: Syltherm XLT, D.C. Silicone 704, D.C. Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water, Neobee M-20, propylene glycol and water. Paint Polyurethane Cover O-rings Buna-N Power Module Field replaceable, keyed connection eliminates the risk of incorrect installation, Intrinsically Safe Lithium-thionyl chloride Power Module (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF) with PBT enclosure Specifications and Reference Data 81 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Shipping Weights for 2051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter Table A-2. Transmitter weights without options Complete Transmitter(1) 2051C with engineered polymer housing 2051T with engineered polymer housing
(1) Add Weight In lb (kg) 3.90 (1,8) Fully functional transmitter with terminal block, covers, and SST flange. 2.3 (1,0) Table A-3. 2051L weights without options Flange 2-in., 150 3-in., 150 4-in., 150 2-in., 300 3-in., 300 4-in., 300 2-in., 600 3-in., 600 DN 50 / PN 40 DN 80 / PN 40 DN 100 / PN 10/16 DN 100 / PN 40 Flush lb. (kg) 6.1 (2,8) 12.3 (5,6) 17.8 (8,1) 7.9 (3,6) 16.2 (7,3) 27 (12,2) 9.4 (4,3) 18.7 (8,5) 7.9 (3,6) 12.6 (5,7) 7.8 (3,5) 9.2 (4,2) 2-in. Ext. lb (kg) 13.0 (5,9) 17.5 (7,9) 16.9 (7,7) 26.9 (12,2) 19.4 (8,8) 13.3 (6,0) 8.5 (3,9) 9.9 (4,5) 4-in. Ext. lb (kg) 14.2 (6,4) 18.7 (8,4) 18.1 (8,2) 28.1 (12,7) 20.6 (9,3) 14.5 (6,6) 9.7 (4,4) 11.1 (5,0) 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) 15.5 (7,0) 20.0 (9,1) 19.4 (8,8) 29.4 (13,3) 21.9 (9,9) 15.8 (7,2) 11.0 (5,0) 12.4 (5,6) Transmitter option weights Option Code Option B4 B1, B2, B3 B7, B8, B9 BA, BC B4 F12, F22 F13, F23 E12, E22 F14, F24 F15, F25 G21 G22 G11 G12 G31 G41
(1) SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange with SST Bolts SST Bracket for Traditional Flange SST Mounting Bracket for In-Line SST Traditional Flange with SST Drain Vents(1) Cast C-276 Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1) SST Coplanar Flange with SST Drain Vents(1) Cast Alloy 400 Traditional Flange with Alloy 400/K-500 Drain Vents(1) SST Traditional Flange with Alloy C-276 Drain Vents(1) Level Flange3 in., 150 Level Flange3 in., 300 Level Flange2 in., 150 Level Flange2 in., 300 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40 Includes mounting bolts. Add lb (kg) 1.2 (0,5) 1.7 (0,8) 1.7 (0,8) 1.6 (0,7) 1.3 (0,6) 3.2 (1,5) 3.6 (1,6) 1.9 (0,9) 3.6 (1,6) 3.2 (1,5) 12.6 (5,7) 15.9 (7,2) 6.8 (3,1) 8.2 (3,7) 7.8 (3,5) 13.0 (5,9) Item Polymer Standard Cover SST Standard Cover Polymer Display Cover SST Display Cover Wireless Battery Cover LCD Display(1) Power Module
(1) Display only. Weight in lb. (kg) 0.2 (0,09) 1.3 (0,6) 0.2 (0,09) 1.5 (0,7) 0.1 (0,04) 0.1 (0,04) 0.4 (0,18) 82 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 A.5 Dimensional Drawings Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Process adapters (option D2) and Rosemount 305 integral manifolds must be ordered with the transmitter. 2051 Wireless Housing with In-Line and Coplanar SuperModule Platform Specifications and Reference Data 83 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Class ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 Table A-4. 2051L Dimensional Specifications Except where indicated, dimensions are in inches (millimeters). Flange Thickness A 0.69 (18) 0.88 (22) 0.88 (22) 0.82 (21) 1.06 (27) 1.19 (30) 1.00 (25) 1.25 (32) 20 mm 24 mm 24 mm 20 mm Pipe Size 2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 DIN 2501 PN 1040 DIN 2501 PN 25/40 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 DIN 2501 PN 10/16 Bolt Circle Diameter B 4.75 (121) 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 7.88 (200) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 125 mm 160 mm 190 mm 180 mm Outside Diameter C 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 9.0 (229) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 10.0 (254) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 165 mm 200 mm 235 mm 220 mm No. of Bolts 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 Bolt Hole Diameter 0.75 (19) 0.75 (19) 0.75 (19) 0.75 (19) 0.88 (22) 0.88 (22) 0.75 (19) 0.88 (22) 18 mm 18 mm 22 mm 18 mm Extension Diameter(1) D NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89) NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89) NA 2.58 (66) NA 65 mm 89 mm 89 mm O.D. Gasket Surface E 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 4.0 (102) 5.4 (138) 6.2 (158) 6.2 (158) Class ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150 Pipe Size 2 (51) Process Side F 2.12 (54) Lower Housing G 1/2 NPT 1/4 NPT 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) H 3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 4 (102) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300 2 (51) 2.12 (54) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 4 (102) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 2 (51) 2.12 (54) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) 3 (76) 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) DIN 2501 PN 1040 DN 50 2.4 (61) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DN 80 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) DN 100 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33) DIN 2501 PN 10/16 DN 100 3.6 (91) 0.97 (25) 1.31 (33)
(1) Tolerances are 0.040 (1,02), 0.020 (0,51). 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 8.66
(219) 8.66
(219) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 6.66
(169) 84 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Ordering Information A.6 Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Transmitter Type Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Model 2051C Measurement Type Standard D G Expanded A Pressure Range 2051CD Differential Gage Absolute Standard 1 2 3 4 5 25 to 25 inH2O
(62.2 to 62.2 mbar) 250 to 250 inH2O
(623 to 623 mbar) 1000 to 1000 inH2O
(2.5 to 2.5 bar) 300 to 300 psi
(20.7 to 20.7 bar) 2000 to 2000 psi
(137.9 to137.9 bar) Expanded 0(1) 3 to 3 inH2O
(7.5 to 7.5 mbar) 2051CG 2051CA 25 to 25 inH2O
(62,1 to 62.2 mbar) 250 to 250 inH2O
(621 to 623 mbar) 393 to 1000 inH2O
(0.98 to 2.5 bar) 14.2 to 300 psi
(0.98 to 20.7 bar) 14.2 to 2000 psi
(0.98 to 137.9 bar) 0 to 30 psia
(0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 150 psia
(0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 800 psia
(0 to 55.2 bar) 0 to 4000 psia
(0 to 275.8 bar) Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Low-Power, 15 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option C2 for 0.83.2 V dc) 420 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Transmitter Output Standard A F W(2) X Expanded M Materials of Construction Process Flange Type Flange Material Drain/Vent Standard 2 3(3) 4 5 7(3) 8(3) 0 Coplanar Coplanar Coplanar Coplanar Coplanar Coplanar Alternate Process Connection SST Cast C-276 Cast Alloy 400 Plated CS SST Plated CS SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400/K-500 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard 85 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 316L SST Alloy C-276 Glass-filled PTFE Graphite-filled PTFE Silicone Inert (Differential and Gage only) Alloy 400 Tantalum (Available on 2051CD and CG, Ranges 25 only. Not available on 2051CA) Gold-plated Alloy 400 (Use in combination with O-ring Option Code B.) Gold-plated SST Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Isolating Diaphragm Standard 2(3) 3(3) Expanded 4 5 6 7 O-ring Standard A B Sensor Fill Fluid Standard 1 2 Housing Material Standard A B J K P Expanded D G M G Options (Include with selected model number) A.6.1 Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard WP5 Plantweb Control Functionality Standard A01 Plantweb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01 Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) 14 NPT M20 1.5 14 NPT M20 1.5 N/A FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite Aluminum SST Conduit Entry Size Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 86 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 10 mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 12mm Adapter/Manifold Bolting (Not available on 2051CD0) Traditional Flange, 316 SST, SST Drain/Vent Traditional Flange, Alloy C, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent Traditional Flange, Cast Alloy 400, Alloy 400/K-500 Drain/Vent Traditional Flange, 316 SST, Alloy C-276 Drain/Vent DIN Compliant Traditional Flange, SST, 1/16 in. Adapter/Manifold Bolting Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount Level Flange, SST, 2 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 150, Vertical Mount Level Flange, SST, 3 in., ANSI Class 300, Vertical Mount DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40, Vertical Mount DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40, Vertical Mount Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Alternate Flange(4) Standard H2 H3(3) H4 H7(3) HJ FA FB FC FD FP FQ Expanded HK(5) HL Manifold Assembly(5)(9) Standard S5 S6 Integral Mount Primary Element(5)(9) Standard S4(6) S3 Seal Assemblies(9) Standard S1(7) S2(8) All-Welded Seal Assemblies (for high vacuum applications)(9) Standard S0 S7 S8 S9 One Seal, All-Welded System (Direct Mount Connection Type) One Seal, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type) Two Seals, All-Welded System (Capillary Connection Type) Two Seals, All-Welded System (One Direct Mount and One Capillary Connection Type) Assemble to Rosemount Annubar or Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice Assemble to Rosemount 405 Compact Orifice Plate Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 seals Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 87 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Traditional Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts Traditional Flange Bracket for Panel Mounting, CS Bolts Traditional Flange Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting, CS Bolts Coplanar Flange Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, all SST B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts B2 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts SST B1 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts SST B3 Bracket with Series 300 SST Bolts Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Mounting Bracket Standard B1 B2 B3 B4 B7 B8 B9 BA BC Product Certifications Standard C6 E2(11) E3(11) E4(10) E5 E7(11) E8 I1(11) I2(11) I3 I4(12) I5 I7(11) IA IE K2(11) K5 K6(11) K7(11) K8(11) KB CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 INMETRO Flameproof Chine Flameproof TIIS Flame-proof FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety TIIS Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only INMETRO Flameproof, Instrinsic Safety FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) IECEx Flame-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition Proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ATEX Type n Certification and Dust China Type n IECEx Type n Certification Standard Standard KD(11) N1(11) N3 N7(11) Drinking Water Approval Standard DW(13) Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS 88 NSF drinking water approval American Bureau of Shipping Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Custody Transfer Standard C5(16) Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range. Contact an Emerson Process Management representative) LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only) LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate Calibration certification and tamper evident seal Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts Alloy K-500 Bolts Bolting Material Standard L4 L5 L6 Display and Interface Options Standard M4(14) M5 M6 Calibration Certificate Standard Q4 QG QP Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(15) QT Hardware Adjustments Standard Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security) D1 DZ Digital Zero Trim Hardware Adjustments Standard J1(16)(17) J3(16)(17) No Local Zero or Span Adjustment Transient Protection Terminal Block Standard T1(18) Software Configuration Standard C1(16) Low Power Output Expanded C2 Specifications and Reference Data Transient Protection Terminal Block Local Zero Adjustment Only Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data Safety certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA data Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) 0.83.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 89 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Gage Calibration (Model 2051CA4 only) Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Gage Pressure Calibration Standard C3 Alarm Limit Standard C4(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High CN(16)(19) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm Low Pressure Testing Expanded P1 Cleaning Process Area Expanded P2 P3 Pressure Calibration Expanded P4 Performance Standard P8(20) Flange Adapters Standard DF(21) D3 D3 1/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s) 18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Hastelloy 18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters), Monel Cleaning for Special Service Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate) High Performance Option Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent Ports Vent/Drain Valves Expanded D7 Conduit Plug Standard DO(22) RC1/4 RC1/2 Process Connection Expanded D9(23) D9 316 SST Conduit Plug Max Static Line Pressure Standard P9 Ground Screw Standard V5(24) External Ground Screw Assembly RC Flange with RC Flange Adapter, CS - SST JIS Process ConnectionRC Flange with RC Flange Adapter, 316SST 4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (2051CD Ranges 25 only) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 90 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals Table A-5. 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Surface Finish Standard Q16 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Conduit Electrical Connector Standard GE GM Typical Model Number: 2051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780
(1) 2051CD0 is available only with Output Code A, Process Flange Code 0 (Alternate Flange H2, H7, HJ, or HK), Isolating Diaphragm Code 2, O-ring Code A, and Bolting Option L4.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast) A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast) Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Standard Standard Standard materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4) Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(5) Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.
(6) Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).
(7) Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.
(8) Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.
(9)
(10) Available only with output codes A - 4-20 HART and F - FOUNDATION fieldbus.
(11) Not available with Low Power code M.
(12) Available only with 2051CD and 2051CG and output code A - 4-20 mA HART
(13) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number. manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(14) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(15) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(16) Not available with Fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus (output code W).
(17) Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified
(18) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(19) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(20) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.
(21) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6.
(22) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(23) Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges.
(24) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. Specifications and Reference Data 91 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model Transmitter Type 2051T Pressure Type Standard Gage G A Absolute Pressure Range In-Line Pressure Transmitter 2051TG(1) 2051TA
-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar)
-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar)
-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar)
-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar)
-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar) 0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar) 0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar) 0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar) Standard 1 2 3 4 5 Transmitter Output Standard A F W(2) X Expanded M Process Connection Style Standard 2B 2C Expanded 2F 61 Isolating Diaphragm Standard 2(3) 3(3) Sensor Fill Fluid Standard 1 2 Housing Material Standard A B J K P S Expanded D M 316L SST Alloy C-276 Aluminum SST Silicone Inert 420 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Low-Power 15 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol 1/214 NPT Female G A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 14 only) Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only) Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only) Process Connection Wetted Parts Material 316L SST Alloy C-276 Conduit Entry Size 14 NPT M20 1.5 14 NPT M20 1.5 N/A N/A G G Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer with Aluminum Module Material Engineered Polymer with SST Module Material Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 92 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal Advanced Control Function Block Suite Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART A.6.2 Options (Include with selected model number) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard WP5 PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard A01 PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01 Manifold Assemblies Standard S5(4) Seal Assemblies Standard S1(4) Mounting Bracket Standard B4 Product Certifications Standard C6 E2 E3 E4(5) E5 E7(5) E8 I1(5) I2 I3 I5 I7(5) IA IE K2 K5 K6(5) K7(5) K8(5) KB Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 INMETRO Flameproof China Flameproof TIIS Flameproof FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety ATEX Intrinsic Safety for FISCO; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7, and E7) ATEX Flame-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ATEX Type n Certification and Dust China Type n IECEx Type n Certification KD(5) N1(5) N3 N7(5) Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 93 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA NSF drinking water approval Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Drinking Water Approval Standard DW(6) Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS Custody Transfer Standard C5 Measurement Canada Accuracy Approval (Limited availability depending on transmitter type and range. Contact an Emerson Process Management representative) American Bureau of Shipping Prior-use certificate of FMEDA Data Hardware adjustments (zero, span, alarm, security) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Local Zero Adjustment Only No Local Zero or Span Adjustment Digital Zero Trim Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal Calibration Certification Standard Q4 QG QP Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(7) Zero/Span Adjustment Standard J1(8)(9) J3(8)(9) DZ Expanded D1 Display and Interface Options Standard M4(10) M5 M6 Conduit Plug Standard DO(11) Transient Terminal Block Standard T1(12) Software Configuration Standard C1(8) Expanded C2(8) Alarm Limit Standard C4(8)(13) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Alarm High CN(8)(13) Analog Output Levels Compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, Low Alarm LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L and M only) 0.83.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Output Code M only) Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) Transient Protection Terminal Block 316 SST Conduit Plug Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 94 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 High Performance Option Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Cleaning for Special Service Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine Table A-6. 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Pressure Testing Expanded P1 Cleaning Process Area(14) Expanded P2 P3 Performance Standard P8(15) Ground Screw Standard V5(16) Surface Finish Standard Q16 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Conduit Electrical Connector Standard GE GM Typical Model Number:
(1) 2051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast) A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast) Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals 2051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4 External Ground Screw Assembly materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(4)
(5) Not available with low-power Option Code M.
(6) Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code). Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified.
(7) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(8) Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or Profibus protocols (output code W).
(9)
(10) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(11) Transmitter is shipped with 316 SST conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug.
(12) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE.
(13) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(14) Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.
(15) High Performance Option includes 0.04% Reference Accuracy. See Performance Specifications for details.
(16) The V5 option is not needed with T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. Specifications and Reference Data 95 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 2051L Pressure Range Standard Transmitter Type Liquid Level Transmitter 250 to 250 inH2O (0,6 to 0,6 bar) 1000 to 1000 inH2O (2,5 to 2,5 bar) 300 to 300 psi (20,7 to 20,7 bar) 2 3 4 Transmitter Output Standard A F W(1) X Expanded 420 mA with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Low-Power 15 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (See Option Code C2 for 0.83.2 V dc Output) M Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side) Standard Code G0(2) H0(2) J0 A0(2) A2(2) A4(2) A6(2) B0(2) B2(2) B4(2) B6(2) C0(2) C2(2) C4(2) C6(2) D0(2) D2(2) D4(2) D6(2) E0 F0 Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side) Process Connection Size 2-in./DN 50 2-in./DN 50 2-in./DN 50 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 Material 316L SST Alloy C-276 Tantalum 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Tantalum Tantalum Extension Length Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only Standard Standard Standard Size 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. Standard M A B 96 Rating ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Material CS CS CS Standard Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. N ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 C ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 D ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 P E ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 X(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 F(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 G(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 Y(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 H(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 J(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 Z(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 L(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 Q PN 40 per EN 1092-1 R PN 40 per EN 1092-1 S V PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 K(2) PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 T(2) PN 40 per EN 1092-1 U(2) PN 40 per EN 1092-1 W(2) PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 7(2) ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 Expanded 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 4 in. CS CS CS CS CS SST SST SST SST SST SST SST SST CS CS CS CS SST SST SST SST SST 1 2 3 4(2) 5(2) 6(2) Seal Fill Fluid (High Side) Standard 10K per JIS B2238 20K per JIS B2238 40K per JIS B2238 10K per JIS B2238 20K per JIS B2238 40K per JIS B2238 Specific Gravity A C D H G N P Syltherm XLT Silicone 704 Silicone 200 Inert (Halocarbon) Glycerine and Water Neobee M-20 Propylene Glycol and Water 0.85 1.07 0.93 1.85 1.13 0.92 1.02 Low Pressure Side CS CS CS 316 SST 316 SST 316 SST Temperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of 70 F (21 C))
-102 to 293 F (-75 to 145 C) 32 to 401 F (0 to 205 C)
-49 to 401 F (-45 to 205 C)
-49 to 320 F (-45 to 160 C) 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 C) 5 to 401 F (-15 to 205 C) 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 C) Configuration Flange Adapter Diaphragm Material Sensor Fill Fluid Standard 11(2) 21(2) 22(2) Gage Differential Differential SST SST SST 316L SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Silicone Silicone Silicone Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard 97 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. 2A(2) 316L SST 2B(2) Alloy C-276 31(2) 316L SST SST SST None Inert (Halocarbon) Inert (Halocarbon) Silicone
(Requires Option Code S1) Differential Differential Tuned-System Assembly with Remote Seal O-ring Standard Glass-filled PTFE A Housing Material Standard A B J K P Expanded Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer Conduit Entry Size 14 NPT M20 1.5 14 NPT M20 1.5 N/A Aluminum SST D M Options (Include with selected model number) A.6.3 Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard G G User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite WP5 PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard A01(3) PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01(3) Seal Assemblies Standard S1(4) Product Certifications Standard FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M) FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust ATEX Type n Certification and Dust ATEX Flameproof and Dust Certification TIIS Flameproof CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 E5 I5 K5 I1(5) N1(5) E8 E4(5) C6 98 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. K6(5) KB CSA and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of C6 and K8) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, and Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, and Type n (combination of I7, N7 and E7) ATEX Flame-proof and Intrinsic Safety Approvals (combination of I1 and E8) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) IECEx Intrinsic Safety IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof IECEx Type n Certification ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe INMETRO Flameproof INMETRO Intrinsic Safety INMETRO Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety China Flameproof China Intrinsic Safety China Type n American Bureau of Shipping Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts Alloy K-500 Bolts ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts K7(5) K8(5) KD(5) I7(5) E7(5) N7(5) IA IE E2 I2 K2 E3 I3 N3 Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS Bolting Material Standard L4 L5 L6 L8 Display and Interface Options Standard M4(6) M5 M6 Calibration Certification Standard Q4 QP QG Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(7) Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Specifications and Reference Data LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display for Aluminum Housing (Housing Codes A, B, C, and D only) LCD Display for SST Housing (Housing Codes J, K, L, and M only) Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 99 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table A-7. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Conduit Electrical Connector Standard M12, 4-pin, Male Connector (eurofast) A size Mini, 4-pin, Male Connector (minifast) Transient Protection Terminal Block Local Zero Adjustment Only No Local Zero or Span Adjustment Digital Zero Trim GE GM Hardware Adjustments Standard J1(8)(9) J3(8)(9) DZ Transient Protection Standard T1(10) Software Configuration Standard C1(8) Low Power Output Standard C2(8) Alarm Limit Standard C4(8)(11) CN(8)(11) Conduit Plug Standard DO Ground Screw Standard V5(12) Lower Housing Flushing Connection Options External Ground Screw Assembly 316 SST Conduit Plug NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) 0.83.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol (Available with Output code M only) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Ring Material Number Size (NPT) 316 SST 316 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 316 SST 316 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Standard F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F0 Typical Model Number: 2051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1
(1) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(2) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Standard limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(3) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F. 100 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(4)
(5) Not available with low-power Option Code M
(6) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(7) Only available with HART 4-20 mA output (output code A).
(8) Not available with fieldbus (output code F) or profibus protocols (output code W).
(9)
(10) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG.
(11) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(12) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. Local zero and span adjustments are standard unless Option Code J1 or J3 is specified. Specifications and Reference Data 101 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Differential Pressure Liquid Gas Steam Product Description Annubar Flowmeter 2-in. (50 mm) 21/2-in. (63.5 mm) 3-in. (80 mm) 31/2-in. (89 mm) 4-in. (100 mm) 5-in. (125 mm) 6-in. (150 mm) 7-in. (175 mm) 8-in. (200 mm) 10-in. (250 mm) 12-in. (300 mm) Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 2051CFA Measurement Type Standard D Fluid Type Standard L G S Line Size Standard 020 025 030 035 040 050 060 070 080 100 120 Expanded 140 160 180 200 240 300 360 420 480 600 720 780 840 900 960 Pipe I.D. Range Standard C D Expanded A B E Z 102 14-in. (350 mm) 16-in. (400 mm) 18-in. (450 mm) 20-in. (500 mm) 24-in. (600 mm) 30-in. (750 mm) 36-in. (900 mm) 42-in. (1066 mm) 48-in. (1210 mm) 60-in. (1520 mm) 72-in. (1820 mm) 78-in (1950 mm) 84-in. (2100 mm) 90-in. (2250 mm) 96-in (2400 mm) Range A from the Pipe I.D. table Range B from the Pipe I.D. table Range E from the Pipe I.D. table Non-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inches Range C from the Pipe I.D. table Range D from the Pipe I.D. table Standard Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Pak-Lok Flanged with opposite side support Chrome-Moly Grade F-11 Chrome-Moly Grade F-22 Chrome-Moly Grade F-91 Carbon steel (A105) 316 Stainless Steel No Mounting (Customer Supplied) Horizontal Piping Vertical Piping with Downwards Flow Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Pipe Material / Mounting Assembly Material Standard C S 0 Expanded G N J Piping Orientation Standard H D U Annubar Type Standard P F Expanded L G M Sensor Material Standard S Expanded H Sensor Size Standard 1 2 3 Mounting Type Standard T1 A1 A3 A6 D1 D3 D6 Compression or Threaded Connection 150# RF ANSI 300# RF ANSI 600# RF ANSI DN PN16 Flange DN PN40 Flange DN PN100 Flange Sensor size 1 Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm) Sensor size 2 Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm) Sensor size 3 Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm) Flange-Lok Gear-Drive Flo-Tap Manual Flo-Tap 316 Stainless Steel Alloy C-276 Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 103 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Expanded A9(1) AF(1) AT(1) R1 R3 R6 R9(1) RF(1) RT(1) Opposite Side Support or Packing Gland Standard 0 900# RF ANSI 1500# RF ANSI 2500 # RF ANSI 150# RTJ Flange 300# RTJ Flange 600# RTJ Flange 900# RTJ Flange 1500# RTJ Flange 2500# RTJ Flange No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models) Opposite Side Support Required for Flanged Models NPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly Extended Tip Welded Opposite Support Assembly Extended Tip C D Expanded Rod Material Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Packing Material PTFE PTFE Graphite Graphite Graphite Packing Gland Required for Flo-Tap Models Packing Gland Material Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Alloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Not Applicable or Customer Supplied Gate Valve, Carbon Steel Gate Valve, Stainless Steel Ball Valve, Carbon Steel Ball Valve, Stainless Steel J K L N R Isolation Valve for Flo-Tap Models Standard 0 Expanded 1 2 5 6 Temperature Measurement Standard T 0 Expanded R Transmitter Connection Platform Standard 3 5 7 Expanded 6 Remote Thermowell and RTD 8 104 Integral RTD not available with Flanged model greater than class 600#
No Temperature Sensor Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT) Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.) Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Aluminum SST Conduit Entry Size 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 N/A Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer 420 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Differential Pressure Range Standard 1 2 3 Transmitter Output Standard A F W(2) X Expanded M Transmitter Housing Material Standard A B J K P Expanded D M Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 A.6.4 Pressure Testing Expanded P1(3) PX(3) Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Material Testing Expanded V1 Material Examination Expanded V2 Flow Calibration Expanded W1 Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 1.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability Options (Include with selected model number) Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection & Performance Certificate Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Extended Hydrostatic Testing Flow Calibration (Average K) Radiographic Examination Dye Penetrant Exam G1/2 G1/2 Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 105 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Canadian Registration NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 European Pressure Directive (PED) ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1 Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid 150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule 300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule 600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Surface Finish Standard RL RH Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8(4) Code Conformance(5) Expanded J2 J3 Materials Conformance Expanded J5(6) Country Certification Standard J6 Expanded J1 Installed in Flanged Pipe Spool Section Expanded H3 H4 H5 Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options Standard G2 G6 Expanded G1 G3 G5 G7 Special Shipment Standard Y1 Special Dimensions Expanded VM VT VS PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard A01(7) PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01(7) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Needle Valves, Carbon Steel Needle Valves, Alloy C-276 OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon Steel OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276 Variable Mounting Variable Tip Variable length Spool Section Needle Valves, Stainless Steel OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 106 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Antenna and SmartPower Standard WP5 Product Certifications Standard C6 E5 E7(8) E8 I1(8) I5 IA K5 K6(8) K8(8) KB CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Flameproof, Dust ATEX Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ATEX Type n Inert Sensor Fill Fluid Note: Silicone fill fluid is standard. Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display American Bureau of Shipping KD(8) N1(8) Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L1 L2 LA Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS Display and Interface Options Standard M4(9) M5 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(11) Transient Protection Standard T1(10) Transient terminal block Manifold for Remote Mount Option Standard F2 F6 Expanded F1 F3 F5 F7 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel 3-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 5-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 107 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Lower Power Output Standard C2(11) Alarm Limit Standard C4(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm CN(11)(12) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm Hardware Adjustments Standard DZ Ground Screw Standard V5(13) Typical Model Number: 2051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2 A A 1
(1) Available in remote mount applications only.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.
(4)
(5) Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.
(6) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification. Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button External Ground Screw Assembly Standard Standard Standard Standard certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(7) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(8) Not available with Low Power code M.
(9) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(10) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
(11) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
(12) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(13) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 108 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 316 SST Conditioning Orifice Plate Orifice Plate Product Description Compact Flowmeter 1/2-in. (15 mm) 1-in. (25 mm) 11/2-in. (40 mm) 2-in. (50 mm) 3-in. (80 mm) 4-in. (100 mm) 6-in. (150 mm) 8-in. (200 mm) 10-in. (250 mm) 12-in. (300 mm) Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 2051CFC Measurement Type Standard D Differential Pressure Primary Element Technology Standard C P Material Type Standard S Line Size Standard 005(1) 010(1) 015(1) 020 030 040 060 080 100 120 Primary Element Style Standard N Primary Element Type Standard 040 065(2) Temperature Measurement Standard 0 Expanded R Transmitter Connection Platform Standard 3 7 Differential Pressure Range Standard 1 2 3 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections 0.40 Beta Ratio 0.65 Beta Ratio Remote Thermowell and RTD No Temperature Sensor Square Edged Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 109 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA G1/2 G1/2 Aluminum SST Conduit Entry Size 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 N/A Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol Up to 1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer 420 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Transmitter Output Standard A F W(3) X Expanded M Transmitter Housing Material Standard A B J K P Expanded D M Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 A.6.5 Installation Accessories Standard AB AC AD DG DH DJ Expanded JB JR JS Remote Adapters Standard FE High Temperature Application Expanded HT Flow Calibration Expanded WC(4) WD(4) Pressure Testing Expanded P1 ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) DIN Alignment Ring (PN16) DIN Alignment Ring (PN40) DIN Alignment Ring (PN100) Flow Calibration Certification (3 point) Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point) Options (Include with selected model number) JIS Alignment Ring (10K) JIS Alignment Ring (20K) JIS Alignment Ring (40K) Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 F) Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT) Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 110 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection and Performance Certificate Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(5) Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Code Conformance Expanded J2 J3 J4 Materials Conformance Expanded J5(6) Country Certification Expanded J1 Product Certifications Standard C6 E5 E7(7) E8 I1(7) I5 IA K5 K6(7) K8(7) KB CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Flameproof, Dust ATEX Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1, and E8) ATEX Type n ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 ANSI/ASME B31.8 NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 Canadian Registration KD(7) N1(7) Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L1 L2 LA Inert Sensor Fill Fluid Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 111 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Standard Standard Standard Standard Transient terminal block American Bureau of Shipping FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS Display and Interface Options Standard M4(8) M5 Transient Protection Standard T1(9) Manifold for Remote Mount Option Standard F2 F6 PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard A01(10) PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01(10) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard WP5 Low Power Output Standard C2(11) Alarm Limit Standard C4(11)(12) CN(11)(12) Hardware Adjustments Standard DZ Ground Screw Standard V5(13) Typical Model Number: 2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5
(1) Not available for Primary Element Technology C.
(2)
(3) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(4) Not available with Primary Element Technology P.
(5) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
(6) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C. User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button External Ground Screw Assembly Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(7) Not available with Low Power code M.
(8) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(9) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
(10) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(11) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
(12) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(13) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 112 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 316 SST Differential Pressure 1/2-in. (15 mm) 1-in. (25 mm) 11/2-in. (40 mm) Product Description Integral Orifice Flowmeter NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded Pipe ends: Beveled Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 2051CFP Measurement Type Standard D Body Material Standard S Line Size Standard 005 010 015 Process Connection Standard T1 S1(1) P1 P2 D1 D2 D3 W1 W3 W6 Expanded A1 A3 A6 R1 R3 R6 Orifice Plate Material Standard S Expanded H M Bore Size Option Standard 0066 0109 0160 0196 0260 0340 0150 Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on 0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 316 SST Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 113 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST 0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. 0250 0345 0500 0630 0800 0295 0376 0512 0748 1022 1184 Expanded 0010 0014 0020 0034 Transmitter Connection Platform Standard D3 D5 R3 R5 Expanded D4 D6 D7 R4 R6 Differential Pressure Ranges Standard 1 2 3 Transmitter Output Standard A F W(2) X Expanded M Transmitter Housing Material Standard A B J K P Expanded Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 420 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus Protocol Profibus PA Protocol Wireless Aluminum Aluminum SST SST Engineered Polymer 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Low-Power, 1-5 V dc with Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 1/2-14 NPT M20 x 1.5 N/A Conduit Entry Size Standard Standard Standard Standard 114 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 G1/2 G1/2 Thermowell and RTD Aluminum SST High Temperature (850 F / 454 C) DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate up to 1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability Options (Include with selected model number) Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. D M Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 A.6.6 Transmitter Body / Bolt Material Expanded GT Temperature Sensor Expanded RT(3) Optional Connection Standard G1 Pressure Testing Expanded P1(4) Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Material Testing Expanded V1 Material Examination Expanded V2 Flow Calibration Expanded WD(5) Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Code Conformance Expanded J2(6) J3(6) J4(6) Materials Conformance Expanded J5(7) Country Certification Standard J6 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection and Performance Certificate ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 ANSI/ASME B31.8 Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 European Pressure Directive (PED) Discharge Coefficient Verification NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 Radiographic Examination Dye Penetrant Exam Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 115 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Canadian Registration Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Expanded J1 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Quality Certification for Safety Standard QS(8) Product Certifications Standard C6 E5 E7(9) E8 I1(9) I5 IA K5 K6(9) K8(9) KB CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof ATEX Flameproof, Dust ATEX Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol only FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5) CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6) ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust (combination of E8, I1 and N1) FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of K5 and C6) FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of K5, C6, I1 and E8) ATEX Type n American Bureau of Shipping LCD Display with Local Operator Interface LCD Display Inert Sensor Fill Fluid Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Inert Sensor Fill Fluid and Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring KD(9) N1(9) Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L1 L2 LA Shipboard Approvals Standard SBS Display and Interface Options Standard M4(10) M5 Transient Protection Standard T1(11) PlantWeb Control Functionality Standard A01(12) PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard D01(12) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4 GHz WirelessHART FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostic Suite Transient terminal block FOUNDATION fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 116 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 0.8-3.2 V dc Output with Digital Signal Based on Hart Protocol Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. WP5 Lower Power Output Standard C2(13) Alarm Limit Standard C4(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, High Alarm CN(13)(14) NAMUR Alarm and Saturation Levels, Low Alarm Hardware Adjustments Standard DZ Ground Screw Standard V5(15) Typical Model Number: 2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5
(1) To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.
(2) Option code M4 - LCD Display with Local Operator Interface required for local addressing and configuration.
(3) Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.
(4) Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.
(5) Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.
(6) Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.
(7) Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to Digital Zero Sensor Trim Configuration Button External Ground Screw Assembly Standard Standard Standard Standard certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(8) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
(9) Not available with Low Power code M.
(10) Available only with output code W - Profibus PA.
(11) The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product Certification code IA.
(12) Only valid with FOUNDATION fieldbus Output Code F.
(13) Not available with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Output Code F) or Profibus (Output Code W).
(14) NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.
(15) The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. Specifications and Reference Data 117 Appendix A: Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 118 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Appendix B Product Certifications Wireless Certifications . page 119 B.1 B.1.1 Wireless Certifications Approved manufacturing locations Rosemount Inc. Chanhassen, Minnesota USA Fisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. Wessling, Germany Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited Singapore Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD Beijing, China B.1.2 European directive information The EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at www.rosemount.com. B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance All wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification. Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device usage. B.1.4 FCC and IC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons. B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Product Certifications 119 Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA B.1.6 North American certifications Factory Mutual (FM) approvals I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof. Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llC Temperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 C) Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 C For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only. Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68 CSA - Canadian Standards Association I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D. Temp Code T3C Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68 For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only. European certifications I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Certificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 C to 70 C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only. IP66/68 1180 II 1G B.1.7 B.1.8 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth. I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017X Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 C to 70 C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only. IP66/68 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth. 120 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 B.1.9 Japanese Certifications I4 TIIS Intrinsic Safety Ex ia IIC T4 Certificate Description TC18649 TC18650 TC18657 2051_CD/CG/LD/LG 2051_CA/TA/TG/LA 2051FA/SFC/SFP B.1.10 China (NEPSI) Certifications I3 China Intrinsic Safety Certificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078 Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367 Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365 Ex ia IIC T4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) See appropriate certificate. Product Certifications 121 Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA 122 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4102, Rev AA June 2012 Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc. Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc. Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o. Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Corporation Syltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation. Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation. Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved. Emerson Process Management Rosemount Measurement 8200 Market Boulevard Chanhassen MN 55317 USA Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307 Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888 Fax +1 952 906 8889 Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. Argelsrieder Feld 3 82234 Wessling Germany Tel 49 (8153) 9390 Fax 49 (8153) 939172 Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461 T (65) 6777 8211 F (65) 6777 0947 Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.com Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., Limited No. 6 North Street, Hepingli, Dong Cheng District Beijing 100013, China T (86) (10) 6428 2233 F (86) (10) 6422 8586 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA June 2012 Rosemount 3051 Wireless Series Pressure, Level, and Flow Solutions with WirelessHART Protocol Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Title Page June 2012 Rosemount 3051 Wireless Series Scalable Pressure, Flow, and Level Solutions Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product. For technical assistance, contacts are listed below:
Customer Central Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions. United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211 Europe/ Middle East/ Africa - 49 (8153) 9390 North American Response Center Equipment service needs. 1-800-654-7768 (24 hoursincludes Canada) Outside of these areas, contact your local Emerson Process Management representative. The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings. For information on Emerson Process Management nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount Sales Representative. i Title Page June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20 cm) from all persons. The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard. Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding flange adapter. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. The Rosemount 3051 and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. ii Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Title Page June 2012 Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping. Each power module contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery. Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping. The power module with the wireless unit contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the battery materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Battery hazards remain when cells are discharged. Power modules should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage temperature should not exceed 30 C (86 F). The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent electrostatic charge build-up. Using the Rosmeount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter in a manner other than what is specified by the menufacturer may impair the protection provided by the equipment. iii Title Page June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA iv Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Contents 1Section 1: Introduction Table of Contents June 2012 1.1 Using This Manual . 1 1.2 Models Covered . 1 1.2.1 Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter . 1 1.2.2 Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter . 1 1.2.3 Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter . 1 1.2.4 Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter. 2 1.2.5 Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level Transmitter . 2 1.3 WirelessHART installation flowchart . 3 1.4 Transmitter overview . 4 1.5 Considerations before transmitter installation. 5 1.5.1 Wireless considerations. 5 1.5.2 Mechanical. 6 1.5.3 Electrical . 6 1.5.4 Environmental . 6 1.6 Service support. 7 1.7 Product Recycling/Disposal . 8 2Section 2: Configuration 2.1 Overview . 9 2.2 Safety Messages . 9 2.2.1 Warnings (). 10 2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration. 10 2.3.1 Connection Diagrams . 10 2.4 Device Network Configuration . 11 2.4.1 Join Device to Network . 11 2.4.2 Configure Update Rate . 12 2.4.3 Remove Power Module . 12 2.5 Review Configuration Data. 13 2.5.1 Review Pressure Information . 13 2.5.2 Review Device Information . 13 2.5.3 Review Sensor Information . 15 2.5.4 Review Radio Information . 15 2.6 Field Communicator . 16 2.7 Check Output . 17 Table of Contents v Table of Contents June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.7.1 Operating Parameters . 17 2.8 Basic Setup. 17 2.8.1 Set Process Variable Unit . 17 2.8.2 Set Transfer Function . 19 2.8.3 Damping . 20 2.8.4 Write Protect . 20 2.9 LCD Display . 21 2.9.1 LCD Display Configuration . 21 2.10Detailed Setup . 22 2.10.1Configure Process Alarms . 22 2.10.2Sensor Temperature Unit . 23 2.11Diagnostics and Service . 23 2.11.1Master Reset . 23 2.11.2Join Status . 23 2.11.3Number of Available Neighbors . 24 2.12Advanced Functions for HART Protocol. 25 2.12.1Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data . 25 3Section 3: Installation 3.1 Overview . 27 3.2 Safety Messages . 27 3.2.1 Warnings (). 28 3.3 Considerations . 29 3.3.1 General . 29 3.3.2 Wireless. 29 3.3.3 Mechanical . 29 3.3.4 Environmental . 30 3.4 Installation Procedures . 31 3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter. 31 3.4.2 Process Connections . 34 3.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation . 36 3.4.4 Grounding . 36 3.4.5 Power Module Installation. 37 3.4.6 Installing the LCD Display . 37 3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . 38 3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. 39 3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure. 39 3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure. 40 3.5.4 Manifold Operation. 40 Table of Contents vi Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table of Contents June 2012 4Section 4: Commissioning 4.1 Safety Messages . 47 4.1.1 Warnings (). 47 4.2 Network Status . 48 4.3 Verify Operation . 48 5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance 5.1 Overview . 51 5.2 Calibration . 51 5.2.1 Sensor Trim Overview . 52 5.2.2 Zero Trim . 53 5.2.3 Sensor Trim . 53 5.2.4 Recall Factory TrimSensor Trim. 54 5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) . 54 5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5). 54 5.3 LCD Screen Messages . 57 5.3.1 Startup Screen Sequence . 57 5.3.2 Diagnostic Button Screen Sequence . 59 5.3.3 Network Diagnostic Status Screens. 60 5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens . 63 6Section 6: Troubleshooting 6.1 Overview . 67 6.2 Safety Messages . 67 6.2.1 Warnings (). 68 6.3 Disassembly Procedures . 72 6.3.1 Removing from Service . 72 6.3.2 Removing the electronics board . 73 6.3.3 Removing the sensor from the housing . 74 6.4 Reassembly procedures . 75 6.5 Reassembly procedures . 75 6.5.1 Attaching electronics board . 75 6.5.2 Reassembling the 3051C process flange . 75 6.5.3 Installing drain/vent valve . 77 Table of Contents vii Table of Contents June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data A.1 Performance Specifications . 79 A.1.1 Conformance to specification (3s (Sigma)) . 79 A.1.2 Digital Output . 79 A.1.3 Reference Accuracy . 80 A.1.4 Flow performance - flow reference accuracy. 80 A.1.5 Total Performance . 81 A.1.6 Long Term Stability. 82 A.1.7 Dynamic Performance . 82 A.1.8 Line Pressure Effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) . 82 A.1.9 Ambient Temperature Effect per 50F (28C) . 83 A.1.10Mounting Position Effects. 83 A.1.11Vibration Effect. 83 A.1.12Power Supply Effect . 83 A.1.13Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . 83 A.2 Functional Specifications . 84 A.2.1 Service. 84 A.2.2 Range and Sensor Limits . 85 A.2.3 Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements. 85 A.3 Wireless Self-Organizing Networks. 86 A.3.1 Overpressure Limits . 86 A.3.2 Static Pressure Limit . 87 A.3.3 Burst Pressure Limits . 87 A.3.4 Temperature limits. 87 A.3.5 Humidity Limits. 88 A.3.6 Volumetric Displacement . 88 A.3.7 Damping. 88 A.4 Physical Specifications. 89 A.4.1 Process Connections . 89 A.4.2 Process-Wetted Parts. 89 A.4.3 Rosemount 3051L process wetted parts . 90 A.4.4 Non-Wetted Parts. 90 A.4.5 Shipping Weights for 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter. 91 A.5 Dimensional Drawings . 93 A.5.1 Ordering Information. 95 A.5.2 Rosemount 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . 95 viii Table of Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table of Contents June 2012 A.5.3 Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter. 101 A.5.4 Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter Series . 105 A.5.5 Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter . 121 A.6 Options . 126 A.7 Spare parts. 131 BAppendix B: Product Certifications B.1 Wireless Certifications. 143 B.1.1 Approved manufacturing locations. 143 B.1.2 European directive information . 143 B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance . 143 B.1.4 FCC and IC . 143 B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM . 143 B.1.6 North American certifications . 144 B.1.7 CSA - Canadian Standards Association . 144 B.1.8 European certifications . 144 B.1.9 Japanese Certifications . 145 B.1.10China (NEPSI) Certifications . 145 Table of Contents ix Table of Contents June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA x Table of Contents Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Section 1 Introduction Using This Manual . page 1 Models Covered . page 1 Service support . page 7 Product Recycling/Disposal . page 8 1.1 Using This Manual The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the Rosemount 3051 Wireless pressure transmitter with WirelessHART protocol. The sections are organized as follows:
Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating 3051 Wireless transmitters. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included. Section 3: Installation contains mechanical and electrical installation instructions. Section 4: Commissioning contains techniques for properly commissioning the device. Section 5: Operation and Maintenance contains operation and maintenance techniques. Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems. Section A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information. Section B: Product Certifications contains approval information. 1.2 Models Covered The following Rosemount 3051 Pressure Transmitters are covered by this manual:
1.2.1 Rosemount 3051CD Differential Pressure Transmitter Measures differential pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar). 1.2.2 Rosemount 3051CG Gage Pressure Transmitter Measures gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar). 1.2.3 Rosemount 3051CA Absolute Pressure Transmitter Measures absolute pressure up to 4000 psia (275,8 bar). Introduction 1 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 1.2.4 Rosemount 3051T Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter Measures gage pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar). 1.2.5 Rosemount 3051L Liquid Level Transmitter Provides precise level and specific gravity measurements up to 300 psi (20,7 bar) for a wide variety of tank configurations. 2 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 1.3 WirelessHART installation flowchart Figure 1-1. WirelessHART installation flowchart START HERE Configure Network ID Configure Join Key Configure Update Rate Bench Calibration?
No Yes Configure for Pressure Configure for Level Configure for Flow Verify Set Units
(page 21) Scaled Variable Configure
(page 31) Scaled Variable Configure
(page 31) Set Range
(page 23) Points Set Scaled Variable to PV
(page 31) Set Scaled Variable to PV
(page 34) Review Transmitter Configuration
(page 20) Apply Pressure Select Linear
(page 22) Output Set Damping
(page 27) Within Specifications?
Yes No Refer to Section 5:
Operation and Maintenance Field Install Mount Transmitter
(page 48) Check Process Connection
(page 56) Install Power
(page 71) Module Confirm Transmitter Configuration
(page 20) Trim the Transmitter
(page 82) Done Introduction 3 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 1.4 Transmitter overview The Rosemount 3051C Coplanar design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP), Gage Pressure
(GP) and Absolute Pressure (AP) measurements. The Rosemount 3051C utilizes capacitance sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 3051T and 3051CA utilize piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements. The major components of the Rosemount 3051 Wireless transmitter are the sensor module and the electronics housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating diaphragms, oil fill system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are installed within the sensor module and include a temperature sensor, a memory module, and the analog to digital signal converter (A/D converter). The electrical signals from the sensor module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing. The electronics housing contains the output electronics board, the wireless antenna, and the battery. The basic block diagram of the Rosemount 3051CD Wireless device is illustrated in Figure X-X on page X. For the Rosemount 3051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter. This signal is then sent via wireless communication to the Gateway. An optional LCD can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board which maintains direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. A glass display cover is provided. For WirelessHART output, the LCD Display features a two-line display. The first line displays the actual measured value, the second line of six characters displays the engineering units. The LCD can also display diagnostics messages. Note LCD Display utilizes a 5x6 character display and can display output and diagnostic messages. See Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2. LCD/LOI Display LCD Display 4 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Figure 1-3. Block diagram of operation A B C Signal Processing Temp. Sensor Sensor Module Memory Microprocessor Sensor linearization Rerange Damping Diagnostics Engineering units Communication Memory Configuration Digital-to-
Analog Signal Conversion WirelessHART Communication A. Sensor Module B. Electronics Board C. WirelessHART Signal to Control System D. Field Communicator D 1.5 1.5.1 Considerations before transmitter installation Wireless considerations Power up sequence The Smart Wireless Gateway (Gateway) should be installed and functioning properly before any wireless devices are powered. Install the power module, SmartPower Solutions, model number 701PGNKF green power module, into the 3051 to power the device. This results in a simpler and faster network installation. Enabling Active Advertising on the Gateway ensures that new devices are able to join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Reference Manual (Document No. 00809-0200-4420). Antenna position The antenna is internal to the pressure transmitter. To achieve optimal range, orient the transmitter with the sensor horizontal and the power module closest to the ground as shown in Figure X-X. Good connectivity can also be achieved in other orientations. The antenna should Introduction 5 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA also be approximately 1 m (3 ft.) from any large structure, building, or conductive surface to allow for clear communication to other devices. Refer to best practices for additional information on optimal mounting locations of device. Recommended practices When mounting the device, recommended practices should be considered to achieve the best wireless performance. See Appendix X for more information on recommended practices. 1.5.2 Mechanical Location When choosing an installation location and position, take into account access to the power module compartment for easy power module replacement Electronics Cover The electronics cover is tightened so that polymer contacts polymer. When removing the electronics cover, ensure that there is no damage done to the o-ring. If damaged replace before reattaching cover, ensuring polymer contacts polymer. 1.5.3 Electrical Power Module The Rosemount 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitter is self-powered. The power module contains one "D" size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each battery contains approximately 5.0 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the battery materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the battery and the power module are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical, or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Use caution when handling the power module, it may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 6.10 m (20 ft). 1.5.4 Environmental Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications. Temperature Effects The transmitter will operate within specifications for ambient temperatures between -40 and 85 C (-40 and 185 F). Heat from the process is transferred to the transmitter housing. If the process temperature is high, the ambient temperature will need to be lower to account for heat transferred to the transmitter housing. See Table 1-1 on page 1-7 for process temperature derating. 6 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Table 1-1. Temperature Derating Process Temperature Process Max Ambient Max Ambient
(C) 260 240 220 200 180 160 140 120 100 85 Temperature (F)
(C) 500 464 428 392 356 320 284 248 212 185 41 45 49 53 57 61 64 68 72 75
(F) 105.8 113 120.2 127.4 134.6 141.8 147.2 154.4 161.6 167 1.6 Service support Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials. The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed. For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative for RMA instructions. To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson Process Management representative. Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included with the returned goods. Introduction 7 Section 1: Introduction June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Shipping considerations for wireless products (Lithium Batteries: Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF):
The unit was shipped to you without the Power Module installed. Please remove the Power Module from the unit prior to shipping. Each power module contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery. Primary lithium batteries are regulated in transportation by the U.S. Department of Transportation, and are also covered by IATA (International Air Transport Association), ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization), and ARD (European Ground Transportation of Dangerous Goods). It is the responsibility of the shipper to ensure compliance with these or any other local requirements. Please consult current regulations and requirements before shipping. The Power Module contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the module integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. Power Module hazards remain when cells are discharged. Power Module should be stored in a clean and dry area. For maximum battery life, storage temperature should not exceed 30 C. Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances. 1.7 Product Recycling/Disposal Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations. 8 Introduction Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Section 2 Configuration Overview . page 9 Safety Messages . page 9 Required Bench Top Configuration . page 10 Device Network Configuration . page 11 Review Configuration Data . page 13 Field Communicator . page 16 Check Output . page 17 Basic Setup . page 17 LCD Display . page 21 Detailed Setup . page 22 Diagnostics and Service . page 23 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol . page 25 2.1 Overview This section contains information on configuration and verification that should be performed prior to installation. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled Fast Keys for each software function below the appropriate headings. Example software function Fast Keys 1, 2, 3, etc. 2.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Configuration 9 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.2.1 Warnings (
) Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or nonincendive field wiring practices. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20cm from all persons. 2.3 Required Bench Top Configuration Bench top configuration requires a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled COMM on the terminal block. See Figure 2-1 on page 11. Bench top configuration consists of testing the transmitter and verifying transmitter configuration data. 3051 Wireless transmitters must be configured before installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench before installation using a Field Communicator, AMS, or any WirelessHART Communicator ensures that all network settings are working correctly. When using a Field Communicator, any configuration changes made must be sent to the transmitter by using the Send key (F2). AMS configuration changes are implemented when the Apply button is clicked. AMS Wireless Configurator AMS is capable of connecting to devices either directly, using a HART modem, or wirelessly via the Smart Wireless Gateway. When configuring the device, double click the device icon or right click and select Configure. 2.3.1 Connection Diagrams Bench Hook-up Connect the bench equipment as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 11, and turn on the Field Communicator by pressing the ON/OFF key or log into AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS will search for a HART-compatible device and indicate when the connection is made. If the Field Communicator or AMS fail to connect, it indicates that no device was found. If this occurs, refer to Section 6: Troubleshooting. 10 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Field Hook-up Figure 2-1 on page 11 illustrates the wiring for a field hook-up with a Field Communicator or AMS. The Field Communicator or AMS may be connected at COMM on the transmitter terminal block. Figure 2-1. Field Communicator Connection 2.4 2.4.1 For HART communication, a 3051 WirelessHART DD is required. Device Network Configuration Join Device to Network Fast Keys 2, 1, 1 In order to communicate with the Smart Wireless Gateway, and ultimately the Host System, the transmitter must be configured to communicate over the wireless network. This step is the wireless equivalent of connecting wires from a transmitter to the host system. 1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 1: Join Device to Network. Using a Field Communicator or AMS, enter the Network ID and Join Key so that they match the Network ID and Join Key of the Smart Wireless Gateway and other devices in the network. If the Network ID and Join Key are not identical to those set in the Gateway, the transmitter will not communicate with the network. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page on the web server. Configuration 11 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.4.2 Configure Update Rate Fast Keys 2, 1, 2 The Update Rate is the frequency at which a new measurement is taken and transmitted over the wireless network. This by default is 1 minute. This may be changed at commissioning, or at any time via AMS Wireless Configurator. The Update Rate is user selectable from 8 seconds to 60 minutes. 1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 2: Configure Update Rate. When device configuration is completed, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. Tighten the cover so that metal contacts metal. 2.4.3 Remove Power Module After the sensor and network have been configured, remove the Power Module and replace the housing cover. The Power Module should be inserted only when the device is ready to be commissioned. Use caution when handling the Power Module. The Power Module may be damaged if dropped from heights in excess of 20 ft. 12 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.5 Review Configuration Data The following is a list of factory default configurations that can be viewed by using the Field Communicator or AMS. Follow the steps below to review the transmitter configuration information. Note Information and procedures in this section that make use of Field Communicator fast key sequences and AMS assume that the transmitter and communication equipment are connected, powered, and operating correctly. 2.5.1 Review Pressure Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 2 To view pressure information:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Unit Transfer Function Damping Upper Range Value Lower Range Value Maximum Minimum Minimum Span 2.5.2 Review Device Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 3 To view device information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 3: Device. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 2 Manufacturer Model Configuration 13 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Final Assembly Number Universal Field Device Software Hardware Descriptor Message Date Model Number I Model Number II Model Number III SI Unit Restriction Country Device ID 14 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.5.3 Review Sensor Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 4 To view sensor information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 4: Sensor. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
Measurement Type Module Type Module Serial Number Sensor Materials Isolator Material Fill Fluid Process Connector Remote Seal Connector Type Connector Material O Ring Material Drain Vent Material Number of Seals Seal Type Diaphragm Material Seal Fill Fluid 2.5.4 Review Radio Information Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 5 To view radio information:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 5: Radio. Select from the corresponding number to view each field:
1 2 3 4 5 Manufacturer Device Type Device Revision Software Revision Hardware Revision Configuration 15 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.6 Field Communicator 1. Active Alerts 2. Communication Status 3. Pressure 4. Pressure Status 5. Last Update Time 1. Join Device to Network 2. Configure Update Rate 3. Zero Trim 4. Configure Device Display 5. Configure Process Alarms 6. Basic Setup 1. Network ID 2. Join Device to Network 3. Broadcast Rates 4. Configure Broadcast Power Level 5. Power Mode 6. Power Source 1. Overview 2. Configure 3. Service Tools 1. Guided Setup 2. Manual Setup 3. Alert Setup 1. HI-HI Alarm 2. HI Alarm 3. LO Alarm 4. LO-LO Alarm 1. Wireless 2. Pressure 3. Device Temperatures 4. Device Information 5. Device Display 6. Other 1. Configure LO-LO Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure HI-HI Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure LO Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Configure HI Alarm 2. Mode 3. Variable 4. Alarm Direction 5. Alarm Limit 6. Dead Band 1. Alerts 2. Variables 3. Communications 4. Routine Maintenance 5. Simulate 1. Join Status 2. Communication Status 3. Join Mode 4. Number of Available Neighbors 5. Number of Advertisements Heard 6. Number of Join Attempts 1. Sensor Calibration 2. Other 1. Pressure 2. Sensor Temperature 3. Electronics Temperature 4. Supply Voltage 1. Sensor Temperature 2. Electronics Temperature 1. Unit 2. Maximum 3. Minimum 1. Tag 2. Long Tag 3. Device 4. Sensor 5. Radio 6. Write Protect 1. Mode 2. Display Options 1. Measurement and Status Log 1. Active Alerts 2. History 1. Percent of Range 2. Pressure 3. Pressure Status 4. Sensor Temperature 5. Sensor Temperature Status 6. Electronics Temperature 7. Electronics Temp Status 8. Supply Voltage 9. Supply Voltage Status 10. Last Update Time 1. Current Lower Trim 2. Current Upper Trim 3. Zero Sensor Trim 4. Lower Sensor Trim 5. Upper Sensor Trim 6. Recall Factory Trim 1. Master Reset 2. Measurement History 3. Advertise to New Devices 1. Configure Update Rate 2. Message 1 3. Message 2 1. Unit 2. Transfer Function 3. Damping 4. Upper Range Value 5. Lower Range Value 6. Maximum 7. Minimum 8. Minimum Span 9. Range Using Applied Value 1. Manufacturer 2. Model 3. Final Assembly Number 4. Universal 5. Field Device 6. Software 7. Hardware 8. Descriptor 9. Message 10. Date 11. Model Number I 12. Model Number II 13. Model Number III 14. SI Unit Restriction 15. Country 16. Device ID 1. Measurement Type 2. Module Type 3. Module Serial Number 4. Sensor Materials 5. Process Connector 6. Remote Seal 1. Number of Seals 2. Seal Type 3. Diaphragm Material 4. Seal Fill Fluid 1. Connector Type 2. Connector Material 3. O Ring Material 4. Drain Vent Material 1. Isolator Fluid 2. Fill Fluid 1. Manufacturer 2. Device Type 3. Device Revision 4. Software Revision 5. Hardware Revision 16 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.7 Check Output Before performing other transmitter operations, ensure that the transmitter is operating properly by checking the operating parameters. 2.7.1 Operating Parameters Fast Keys 3, 2 The pressure output value in both engineering units and percent of range will reflect the applied pressure even when the applied pressure is outside of the configured range as long as the applied pressure is between the upper and lower range limit of the transmitter. For example, if a Range 2 3051T (LRL = 0 psi, URL = 150 psi) is ranged from 0 to 100 psi, an applied pressure of 150 psi will return a % of range output of 150% and an engineering output of 150 psi. To view the Operating Parameters menu:
1. 2. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 2: Variables. The Operating Parameters menu displays the following information pertaining to the device:
Percent of Range Pressure Pressure Status Sensor Temperature Sensor Temperature Status Electronics Temperature Electronics Temperature Status Supply Voltage Supply Voltage Status Last Update Time 2.8 2.8.1 Basic Setup Set Process Variable Unit Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 1 The PV Unit command sets the process variable units to allow you to monitor your process using the appropriate units of measure. To select a unit of measure for the PV:
Configuration 17 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 1: Unit to select from the following engineering units:
inH2O inHg ftH2O mmH2O mmHg psi bar mbar g/cm2 kg/cm2 Pa kPa torr atm MPa inH2O at 4 C mmH2O at 4 C 18 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.8.2 Set Transfer Function Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 2 The 3051 Wireless has two output settings: Linear and Square Root. Activate the square root output option to make output proportional to flow. As input approaches zero, the 3051 Wireless automatically switches to linear output in order to ensure a more smooth, stable output near zero (see Figure 2-2). From 0 to 0.6 percent of the ranged pressure input, the slope of the curve is unity (y = x). This allows accurate calibration near zero. Greater slopes would cause large changes in output (for small changes at input). From 0.6 percent to 0.8 percent, curve slope equals 42 (y = 42x) to achieve continuous transition from linear to square root at the transition point. To select the output transfer function:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 2: Transfer Function and choose either Linear or Square Root. Figure 2-2. Square Root Output Transition Point Full Scale Flow (%) Sq. Root Curve Transition Point Slope=42 Slope=1 Sq. Root Curve Transition Point Linear Section Configuration 19 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.8.3 Damping Fast Keys 2, 2, 2, 3 The Damping command introduces a delay in processing which increases the response time of the transmitter; smoothing variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. In the 3051 Wireless pressure transmitter, damping only takes effect when the device is placed in high power refresh mode and during calibration. In normal power mode, the effective damping is 0. Note that when the device is in high power refresh mode, battery power will be depleted rapidly. Determine the appropriate damp setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics of your system. The damping value of your device is user selectable from 0 to 25.6 seconds. To determine the current damping value:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 2: Pressure. Select 3: Damping. 2.8.4 Write Protect Fast Keys 2, 2, 4, 6 The 3051 Wireless has a software write protect security feature. The view write protect security settings:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 4: Device Information. Select 6: Write Protect. 20 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.9 2.9.1 LCD Display LCD Display Configuration Fast Keys 2, 1, 4 The LCD display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. Note Use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002. The LCD display features a four-line display and a bar graph. The first line of five characters displays the output description, the second line of seven digits displays the actual value, the third line of six characters displays engineering units and the fourth line displays Error when the transmitter is in alarm. The LCD display can also display diagnostic messages. The bar graph represents the network connectivity status. See LCD Screen Messages on page 57 for more information on LCD messages. To configure LCD display options:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 4: Configure Device Display. Configuration 21 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2.10 Detailed Setup 2.10.1 Configure Process Alarms Fast Keys 2, 1, 5 Alerts allow the user to configure the transmitter to output a HART message when the configured data point is exceeded. A process alert will be transmitted continuously if the set points are exceeded and the alert mode is ON. An alert will be displayed on a Field Communicator, AMS status screen or in the error section of the LCD display. The alert will reset once the value returns within range. Note HI alert value must be higher than the LO alert value. Both alert values must be within the pressure or temperature sensor limits. Example 1: Rising Alert t n e m e r u s a e M f o s t i n U Alert OFF Alert ON Alert OFF Deadband Time Alert Set Point Assigned Value Example 2: Falling Alert t n e m e r u s a e M f o s t i n U Alert OFF Alert ON Alert OFF Assigned Value Alert Set Point Deadband Time To configure the process alerts, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 5: Configure Process Alarms and follow the on-screen instructions to complete configure of process alarms. 22 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.10.2 Sensor Temperature Unit Fast Keys 2, 2, 3, 1, 1 The Sensor Temperature Unit command selects between Celsius and Fahrenheit units for the sensor temperature. The sensor temperature output is accessible via HART only. To select the sensor temperature unit:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 2: Manual Setup. Select 3: Device Temperatures. Select 1: Sensor Temperature. Select 1: Unit to select from Celsius or Fahrenheit. 2.11 Diagnostics and Service Diagnostics and service functions listed below are primarily for use after field installation. The Transmitter Test feature is designed to verify that the transmitter is operating properly, and can be performed either on the bench or in the field. 2.11.1 Master Reset Fast Keys 3, 4, 2, 1 The master reset function will reset the device electronics. To perform a master reset:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 4: Routine Maintenance. Select 2: Other. Select 1: Master Reset. 2.11.2 Join Status Fast Keys 3, 3, 1 To view the join status of the device, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 3: Communications. Select 1: Join Status. Configuration 23 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Wireless devices join the secure network through a four step process:
Step 1. Network Found Step 2. Network Security Clearance Granted Step 3. Network Bandwidth Allocated Step 4. Network Join Complete 2.11.3 Number of Available Neighbors Fast Keys 3, 3, 4 In a self-organizing network, the more neighbors a device has, the more robust the network will be. To view the number of available neighbors for the wireless device, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 3: Routine Maintenance. Select 4: Number of Available Neighbors. 24 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 2: Configuration June 2012 2.12 Advanced Functions for HART Protocol 2.12.1 Saving, Recalling, and Cloning Configuration Data Fast Keys left arrow, 1, 2 Use the cloning feature of the Field Communicator or the AMS User Configuration feature to configure several 3051 Wireless transmitters similarly. Cloning involves configuring a transmitter, saving the configuration data, then sending a copy of the data to a separate transmitter. Several possible procedures exist when saving, recalling, and cloning configuration data. For complete instructions refer to the Field Communicator manual (publication no. 00809-0100-4276) or AMS Books Online. One common method is as follows:
Field Communicator 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Completely configure the first transmitter. Save the configuration data:
Select F2 SAVE from the Field Communicator HOME/ONLINE screen. a. b. Ensure that the location to which the data will be saved is set to MODULE. If it is not, select 1: Location to set the save location to MODULE. Select 2: Name, to name the configuration data. The default is the transmitter tag number. d. Ensure that the data type is set to STANDARD. If the data type is NOT STANDARD, select 3: Data Type to set the data type to STANDARD. Select F2 SAVE. c. e. Connect and power the receiving transmitter and Field Communicator. Select the back arrow from the HOME/ONLINE screen. The Field Communicator menu appears. Select 1: Offline, 2: Saved Configuration, 1: Module Contents to reach the MODULE CONTENTS menu. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select and retrieve the required configuration. Select 1: Edit. Select 1: Mark All. Select F2 SAVE. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll through the list of configurations in the memory module, and use the RIGHT ARROW to select the configuration again. Select 3: Send to download the configuration to the transmitter. Select OK after the control loop is set to manual. After the configuration has been sent, select OK. Configuration 25 Section 2: Configuration June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA When finished, the Field Communicator informs you of the status. Repeat Steps 3 through 13 to configure another transmitter. Note The transmitter receiving cloned data must have the same software version (or later) as the original transmitter. AMS creating a Reusable Copy To create a reusable copy of a configuration perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Completely configure the first transmitter. Select View then User Configuration View from the menu bar (or click the toolbar button). In the User Configuration window, right click and select New from the context menu. In the New window, select a device from the list of templates shown, and click OK. The template is copied into the User Configurations window, with the tag name highlighted; rename it as appropriate and press Enter. Note A device icon can also be copied by dragging and dropping a device template or any other device icon from AMS Explorer or Device Connection View into the User Configurations window. The Compare Configurations window appears, showing the Current values of the copied device on one side and mostly blank fields on the other (User Configuration) side. 6. 7. Transfer values from the current configuration to the user configuration as appropriate or enter values by typing them into the available fields. Click Apply to apply the values, or click OK to apply the values and close the window. AMS Applying a User Configuration Any amount of user configurations can be created for the application. They can also be saved, and applied to connected devices or to devices in the Device List or Plant Database. To apply a user configuration perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. Select the desired user configuration in the User Configurations window. Drag the icon onto a like device in AMS Explorer or Device Connection View. The Compare Configurations window opens, showing the parameters of the target device on one side and the parameters of the user configuration on the other. Transfer parameters from the user configuration to the target device as desired, Click OK to apply the configuration and close the window. 26 Configuration Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Section 3 Installation Overview . page 27 Safety Messages . page 27 Considerations . page 29 Installation Procedures . page 31 Installing the LCD Display . page 37 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds . page 38 3.1 Overview The information in this section covers installation considerations. A Quick Installation Guide
(document number 00825-0100-4100) is shipped with every transmitter to describe basic installation and startup procedures. Dimensional drawings for each Rosemount 3051 Wireless variation and mounting configuration are included in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled Fast Keys for each software function below the appropriate headings. 3.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operation. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated with a warning symbol (
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
). Refer to the following safety messages before Installation 27 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 3.2.1 Warnings (
) Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury. Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation. Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 Wireless reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service. Replacement equipment or spare parts not approved by Rosemount Inc. for use as spare parts could reduce the pressure retaining capabilities of the transmitter and may render the instrument dangerous. Use only bolts supplied or sold by Rosemount Inc. as spare parts. Improper assembly of manifolds to traditional flange can damage SuperModule. For safe assembly of manifold to traditional flange, bolts must break back plane of flange web (i.e., bolt hold) but must not contact module housing. The Power Module with the wireless unit contains one D size primary lithium/thionyl chloride battery (Green Power Module, model number 701PGNKF). Each Power Module contains approximately 5 grams of lithium. Under normal conditions, the Power Module materials are self-contained and are not reactive as long as the batteries and the pack integrity are maintained. Care should be taken to prevent thermal, electrical or mechanical damage. Contacts should be protected to prevent premature discharge. 28 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3.3 3.3.1 Considerations General Measurement performance depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best performance. Also, consider the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation. 3.3.2 Wireless Power Up Sequence The Power Module should not be installed on any wireless device until the Smart Wireless Gateway is installed and functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway beginning with the closest. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Enable High Speed Operation on the Gateway to ensure that new devices join the network faster. For more information see the Smart Wireless Gateway Manual (Doc. No. 00809-0200-4420). Field Communicator Connections In order for the Field Communicator to interface with the 3051, the Power Module must be connected. Figure 3-1. Field Communicator Connections 3.3.3 Mechanical Note For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement. Note When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the Coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3.4.2 on page 34, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service. Installation 29 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 3.3.4 Environmental Access requirements and cover installation on page 31 can help optimize transmitter performance. Mount the transmitter to minimize ambient temperature changes, vibration, mechanical shock, and to avoid external contact with corrosive materials. Appendix A:
Specifications and Reference Data lists temperature operating limits. Figure 3-2. Installation Flowchart START HERE Bench Calibration?
No Yes Configure
(Section 2) Set Units Set Range Points Set Network Parameters Verify Review Transmitter Configuration
(page 11) Apply Pressure Within Specifications?
Yes No Refer to Section 4 Operation and Maintenance Field Install Check Switches
(page 36) Mount Transmitter
(page 31) Install Power
(pages 3736) Module Check Process Connection
(page 34) Confirm Transmitter Configuration
(page 11) Trim Transmitter for Mounting
(page 52) Effects Done 30 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3.4 Installation Procedures For dimensional drawing information refer to Dimensional Drawings on page 93. Process Flange Orientation Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input. Housing Rotation See Consider Housing Rotation on page 36. Power Module Side of Electronics Housing Mount the transmitter so the Power Module side is accessible. Clearance of 2.75-in. (70 mm) is required for cover removal. Circuit Side of Electronics Housing Provide 0.75 in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. Three inches of clearance is required for cover removal if a meter is installed. Cover Installation Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that polymer contacts polymer. Use Rosemount O-rings. 3.4.1 Mount the Transmitter Mounting Brackets Facilitate mounting transmitter to a 2-in. pipe, or to a panel. The B4 Bracket (SST) option is standard for use with the Coplanar and In-Line flanges. Coplanar Flange Mounting Configura-
tions on page 93 shows bracket dimensions and mounting configurations for the B4 option. Options B1B3 and B7B9 are sturdy, epoxy/polyester-painted brackets designed for use with the traditional flange. The B1B3 brackets have carbon steel bolts, while the B7B9 brackets have stainless steel bolts. The BA and BC brackets and bolts are stainless steel. The B1/B7/BA and B3/B9/BC style brackets support 2-inch pipe-mount installations, and the B2/B8 style brackets support panel mounting. Note Most transmitters are calibrated in the horizontal position. Mounting the transmitter in any other position will shift the zero point to the equivalent amount of liquid head caused by the varied mounting position. To reset zero point, refer to Sensor Trim on page 53. Position the antenna such that it is vertical, typically straight up (antenna may be pointed down as well.) Installation 31 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Flange Bolts The 3051 can be shipped with a Coplanar flange or a Traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the Coplanar and Traditional flanges can be found on page 2-6, 7. Stainless steel bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson Process Management are identified by their head markings:
B7M Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings 316 B8M 660 CL A F593_ F593_ Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings
* The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M. KM Alloy K-500 Head Marking Bolt Installation Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 3051 or sold by Emerson Process Management as spare parts. When installing the transmitter to one of the optional mounting brackets, torque the bolts to 125 in-lb. (0,9 N-m). Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1. 2. 3. Finger-tighten the bolts. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern. Torque values for the flange and manifold adapter bolts are as follows:
Table 3-1. Bolt Installation Torque Values Bolt Material Initial Torque Value CS-ASTM-A445 Standard 316 SSTOption L4 ASTM-A-193-B7MOption L5 Alloy K-500Option L6 ASTM-A-453-660Option L7 ASTM-A-193-B8MOption L8 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) Final Torque Value 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 650 in.-lb (73 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) 32 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Impulse Piping The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: leaks, friction loss
(particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs. The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe depends on the process itself. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping:
Keep impulse piping as short as possible. For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection. For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1 inch per foot (8 cm per m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection. Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines. Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature. Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage. Vent all gas from liquid piping legs. When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level. When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter. Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 F [121 C]) process material out of direct contact with the SuperModule and flanges. Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping. Keep the liquid head balanced on both legs of the impulse piping. Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange. Installation 33 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Mounting Requirements Refer to Figure 3.4.2 for examples of the following mounting configurations:
Liquid Flow Measurement Place taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the process isolators. Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases vent into the process line. Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent. Gas Flow Measurement Place taps in the top or side of the line. Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so to drain liquid into the process line. Steam Flow Measurement Place taps to the side of the line. Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that impulse piping will remain filled with condensate. Fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam from contacting the transmitter directly and to ensure accurate measurement start-up. Note For steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the Coplanar process flanges must not exceed 250 F (121 C) for transmitters with silicone fill, or 185 F (85 C) for inert fill. For vacuum service, these temperature limits are reduced to 220 F
(104 C) for silicone fill and 160 F (71 C) for inert fill. 3.4.2 Process Connections 3051 Wireless transmitter flange process connection size is 1/418 NPT. Flange adapters with 1/214 NPT connections are available as the D2 option. Use your plant-approved lubricant or sealant when making the process connections. The process connections on the transmitter flange are on 21/8-inch (54 mm) centers to allow direct mounting to a three-valve or five-valve manifold. Rotate one or both of the flange adapters to attain connection centers of 2 inches
(51 mm), 21/8 inches (54 mm), or 21/4 inches (57 mm). Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure to avoid leakage. When properly installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module housing. Do not attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service. To install adapters to a Coplanar flange, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the flange bolts. Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed. Clamp the adapters and the Coplanar flange to the transmitter module using the longer of the bolts supplied. Tighten the bolts. Refer to Flange Bolts on page 32 for torque specifications. 34 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Failure to install proper flange adapter o-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in death or serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique o-ring grooves. Only use the o-ring that is designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below. ROSEMOUNT 3051S / 3051 / 2051 / 3001 / 3095 / 2024 Flange Adapter O-ring ROSEMOUNT 1151 PTFE Based Elastomer Flange Adapter O-ring PTFE Elastomer Note PTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed. Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the Teflon O-rings. Replace them if there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. If you replace the O-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body reassembly procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting on page 67. Installation 35 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 3.4.3 Consider Housing Rotation The housing can be rotated to improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD display. Perform the following procedure:
Figure 3-3. Housing rotation A. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required) A 1. 2. Loosen the housing rotation set screw. Turn the housing up to 180 degrees to the left or right of its original (as shipped) position. Note Do not rotate the housing more than 180 degrees without first performing a disassembly procedure (see Removing from Service on page 72). Over-rotation may sever the electrical connection between the sensor module and the feature board. 3. Retighten the housing rotation set screw. In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place. Note If LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins before snapping the LCD display back into place. 3.4.4 Grounding Transmitter Case Always ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include:
External Ground Assembly: This assembly is included with the optional transient protection terminal block (Option Code T1), and it is included with various hazardous location certifications. The External Ground Assembly can also be ordered with the transmitter (Option Code V5), or as a spare part. 36 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3.4.5 Power Module Installation Figure 3-4. Power Module A A. Housing rotation screw (5/64-inch hex wrench required) To make connections, perform the following procedure:
1. 2. 3. Remove the housing cover on the Power Module compartment side. The Power Module supplies all power to the transmitter. Connect Power Module 701PGNKF. Replace the Power Module cover and tighten to safety specification (metal to metal). 3.4.6 Installing the LCD Display Transmitters ordered with the LCD display will be shipped with the display installed. Note Only use Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002 Note An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device. In addition to housing rotation, the optional LCD display can be rotated in 90-degree increments by squeezing the two tabs, pulling out, rotating and snapping back into place. If LCD pins are inadvertently removed from the interface board, carefully re-insert the pins before snapping the LCD display back into place. Use the following procedure and Figure 3-5 to install the LCD display:
Installation 37 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 1. 2. 3. Remove the back cover and Power Module. Remove the transmitter cover opposite the field terminal side. Do not remove the instrument covers in explosive environments when the circuit is live. Engage the four-pin connector into the LCD display and snap into place. Note the following LCD temperature limits:
Operating:40 to 175 F (40 to 80 C) Storage:40 to 185 F (40 to 85 C) Figure 3-5. Optional LCD Display 3.5 Rosemount 304, 305 and 306 Integral Manifolds The Rosemount 305 is available in two designs: Traditional and Coplanar. The traditional 305 Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the market today. The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is used with In-line transmitters to provide block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar). The Rosemount 304 comes in two basic styles: traditional (flange x flange and flange x pipe) and wafer. The 304 traditional manifold comes in 2, 3, and 5-valve configurations. The 304 wafer manifold comes in 3 and 5 valve configurations. 38 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Figure 3-6. Integral Manifold Designs 3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure To install a 305 Integral Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:
1. Inspect the Teflon sensor module O-rings. If the O-rings are undamaged, reusing them is recommended. If the O-rings are damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example), replace them with new O-rings. Important If replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings. 2. 3. 4. Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 2.25-in. manifold bolts for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See Flange Bolts on page 32 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing. If the Teflon sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings. If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter. Note Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, Zero Trim on page 53. 3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Installation Procedure The 306 Manifold is for use only with a 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter. Assemble the 306 Manifold to the 3051T Wireless In-line transmitter with a thread sealant. Installation 39 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 1. 2. 3. 4. Place transmitter into holding fixture. Apply appropriate thread paste or tape to threaded instrument end of the manifold. Count total threads on the manifold before starting assembly. Start turning the manifold by hand into the process connection on the transmitter. Note If using thread tape, be sure the thread tape does no strip when the manifold assembly is started. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Wrench tighten manifold into process connection. (Note: Minimum toque value is 425 in-lbs) Count how many threads are still showing. (Note: Minimum engagement is 3 revolutions) Subtract the number of threads showing (after tightening) from the total threads to calculate the revolutions engaged. Further tighten until a minimum of 3 rotations is achieved. For block and bleed manifold, verify the bleed screw is installed and tightened. For two-valve manifold, verify the vent plug is installed and tightened. Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter. 3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold Installation Procedure To install a 304 Conventional Manifold to a 3051 Wireless transmitter:
1. 2. 3. Align the Conventional Manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold bolts for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See Flange Bolts on page 2-6 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the module housing. If applicable, install flange adapters on the process end of the manifold using the 1.75-in. flange bolts supplied with the transmitter. 3.5.4 Manifold Operation Improper installation or operation of manifolds may result in process leaks, which may cause death or serious injury. Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate any shift due to mounting effects. See Section 5: Operation and Maintenance, Sensor Trim Overview on page 52. Three and five-valve configurations shown:
40 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 In normal operation the two block valves between the process and instrument ports will be open and the equalizing valve will be closed. 1. 2. To zero the 3051, close the block valve to the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter first. Open the center (equalize) valve to equalize the pressure on both sides of the transmitter. The manifold valves are now in the proper configuration for zeroing the transmitter. 3. After zeroing the transmitter, close the equalizing valve. 4. Open the block valve on the low pressure side of the transmitter to return the transmitter to service. H H H H H Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Equalize
(closed) Process Equalize
(closed) Process Equalize
(open) Process Equalize
(closed) Process Equalize
(closed) Process L L L L L Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(closed) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(closed) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(closed) Drain/
Vent Valve Isolate
(open) Installation 41 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Five-valve Natural Gas configurations shown:
In normal operation, the two block valves between the process and instrument ports will be open, and the equalizing valves will be closed. 1. To zero the 3051, first close the block valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. H L Equalize
(closed) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Process Drain Vent Process H L Equalize
(closed) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(closed) Process Drain Vent Process Note Do not open the low side equalize valve before the high side equalize valve. Doing so will overpressure the transmitter. 2. Open the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side of the transmitter. H L Equalize
(open) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(closed) Process Drain Vent
(closed) Process 42 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the equalize valve on the low pressure
(downstream) side of the transmitter. The manifold is now in the proper configuration for zeroing the transmitter. H L Equalize
(open) Equalize
(open) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(closed) After zeroing the transmitter, close the equalize valve on the low pressure
(downstream) side of the transmitter. Close the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side. Finally, to return the transmitter to service, open the low side isolation valve. Process Drain Vent
(closed) Process H L Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Equalize
(open) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(closed) Process Drain Vent
(closed) Process H L Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Equalize
(closed) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(closed) Process Drain Vent
(closed) Process H L Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Equalize
(closed) Equalize
(closed) Test
(Plugged) Isolate
(open) Process Drain Vent
(closed) Process Installation 43 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Installation 44 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 3: Installation June 2012 Installation 45 Section 3: Installation June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 46 Installation Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 4: Commissioning June 2012 Section 4 Commissioning Safety Messages . page 47 Network Status . page 48 Verify Operation . page 48 4.1 Safety Messages Instructions and procedures in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that potentially raises safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol (
performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
). Please refer to the following safety messages before 4.1.1 Warnings (
) Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury. Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation. Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate hazardous locations certifications. Process leaks could result in death or serious injury. Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Do not attempt to loosen or remove process connectors while the transmitter is in service. Electrical shock could cause death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Note The Rosemount 3051 Wireless and all other wireless devices should be installed only after the Smart Wireless Gateway has been installed and is functioning properly. Wireless devices should also be powered up in order of proximity from the Smart Wireless Gateway, beginning with the closest device to the Smart Wireless GatewaySmart. This will result in a simpler and faster network installation. Commissioning 47 Section 4: Commissioning June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 4.2 Network Status If the Rosemount 3051 Wireless was configured with the Network ID and Join Key and sufficient time for network polling has passed, the transmitter should be connected to the network. To verify connectivity, open the Smart Wireless Gateways integral web interface and navigate to the Explorer page. This page will display the transmitters HART tag, PV, SV, TV, QV, and Update Rate. A green status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that there is a problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a specific device, click on the tag name. 4.3 Verify Operation Operation can be verified in three locations, at the device via the Local Display, using the Field Communicator, or at the Smart Wireless Gateways integrated web interface. Local Display The LCD will display the PV value at the same rate as the configured update rate, but no faster than once every 60 seconds. Press the Diagnostic button to display the TAG, Device ID, Network ID, Network Join Status and Device Status screens. For Device Status screens, see LCD Screen Messages on page 57. 48 Commissioning Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 4: Commissioning June 2012 Figure 4-1. Diagnostic Screen Sequence Tag Device ID Network ID Status Device Status Network Join A b c d e f g h i d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n e t w k n e t w k 13 0 5 I D O K S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s Figure 4-2. Network Join Status Screens Searching for Network Joining Network Connected with Limited Bandwidth Connected N E T w K n e t w k n e t w k S R C H N G N E G O T L I M - O P n e t w k O K Field Communicator To verify device operation using a HART Field Communicator, a 3051 Wireless DD is required. For connecting with a Field Communicator, refer to Figure 2-1 on page 11. Function Communications Key Sequence 3, 3 Menu Items Join Status, Wireless Mode, Join Mode, Number of Available Neighbors, Number of Advertisements Heard, Number of Join Attempts. Smart Wireless Gateway To verify device operation using the Smart Wireless Gateways integrated web interface, navigate to the Explorer page. This page will show whether the device has joined the network and if it is communicating properly. Commissioning 49 Section 4: Commissioning June 2012
. Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA A green status indicator means that the device is working properly. A red indicator means that there is a problem with either the device or its communication path. For more detail on a specific device, click on the tag name. Troubleshooting The most common cause of incorrect operation is incorrect configuration of the Network ID and Join Key. The Network ID and Join Key in the device must match that of the Smart Wireless Gateway. The Network ID and Join Key may be obtained from the Smart Wireless Gateway on the Setup>Network>Settings page of the web interface. 50 Commissioning Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Section 5 Operation and Maintenance Overview . page 51 Calibration . page 51 LCD Screen Messages . page 57 5.1 Overview This section contains information on commissioning and operating 3051 Wireless Pressure Transmitters. Field Communicator and AMS instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator fast key sequences are labeled Fast Keys for each software function below the appropriate headings. 5.2 Calibration Calibrating a 3051 Wireless transmitter may include the following procedures:
Sensor Trim: Adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to optimize performance over a specified pressure range, or to adjust for mounting effects. The 3051 sensor module uses a microprocessor that contains information about the sensors specific characteristics in response to pressure and temperature inputs. A smart transmitter compensates for these sensor variations. The process of generating the sensor performance profile is called factory sensor characterization. Sensor trimming requires an accurate pressure input and adds additional compensation that adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve to optimize performance over a specific pressure range. Note Sensor trimming adjusts the position of the factory sensor characterization curve. It is possible to degrade performance of the transmitter if the trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment. Operation and Maintenance 51 Transmitter 3051CD 3051CG 3051L 3051TG, Range 1-4 3051CA 3051TA 3051TG, Range 5 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table 5-1. Recommended Calibration Tasks Bench Calibration Tasks 1. Set output configuration parameters:
Field Calibration Tasks 1. Reconfigure parameters if necessary. Set the range points. Set the output units. Set the output type. a. b. c. d. Set the damping value. Optional: Perform a sensor trim.
(Accurate pressure source required.) 2. 3. Set output configuration parameters:
1. Set the range points. Set the output units. Set the output type. a. b. c. d. Set the damping value. Optional: Perform a sensor trim if equipment available (accurate absolute pressure source required), otherwise perform the low trim value section of the sensor trim procedure. 2. 3. 2. 1. 2. Zero trim the transmitter to compensate for mounting effects or static pressure effects. Optional: Perform an analog output trim. (Accurate multimeter required) Reconfigure parameters if necessary. Perform low trim value section of the sensor trim procedure to correct for mounting position effects. Optional: Perform an analog output trim (Accurate multimeter required) Note:
A Field Communicator or AMS is required for all sensor and output trim procedures. Rosemount 3051C Range 4 and Range 5 transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications under high static line pressure. 5.2.1 Sensor Trim Overview Trim the sensor using either sensor or zero trim functions. Trim functions vary in complexity and are application-dependent. Both trim functions alter the transmitters interpretation of the input signal. Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be used in place of a sensor trim over the full sensor range. When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled to the correct levels. Note Do not perform a zero trim on 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitters. Zero trim is zero based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting position effects on a 3051 Wireless absolute pressure transmitter, perform a low trim within the sensor trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim function, but it does not require zero-based input. 52 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Sensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are applied, and all output is linearized between them. Always adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct offset. Adjustment of the high trim value provides a slope correction to the characterization curve based on the low trim value. The trim values allow you to optimize performance over your specified measuring range at the calibration temperature. During a trim operation, the 3051 Wireless is placed in high power refresh mode, which provides frequent pressure measurement updates and allows the configured damping to take effect. This behavior allows for more accurate calibration of the device. When the device is in high power refresh mode, the battery power supply will be depleted more rapidly. 5.2.2 Zero Trim Fast Keys 2, 1, 3 Note The transmitter must be within three percent of true zero (zero-based) in order to calibrate with zero trim function. After properly venting the transmitter, calibrate the transmitter with the zero trim function:
1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, select 2: Configure. Select 1: Guided Setup. Select 3: Zero Trim and follow the on-screen instruction to complete the zero trim adjustment. 5.2.3 Sensor Trim Fast Keys 3, 4, 1 Note Use a pressure input source that is at least three times more accurate than the transmitter, and allow the input pressure to stabilize for ten seconds before entering any values. To calibrate the transmitter using the sensor trim function:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Assemble and power the entire calibration system including the 3051, Field Communicator/AMS, power supply, pressure input source, and readout device. From the Home screen, select 3: Service Tools. Select 4: Routine Maintenance. Select 1: Sensor Calibration. Select 4: Lower Sensor Trim. The lower sensor trim value should be the sensor trim point that is closest to zero. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the lower value. Repeat the procedure for the upper value. Select 5: Upper Sensor Trim and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the adjustment of the upper value. Operation and Maintenance 53 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Note Select pressure input values so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the Lower and Upper Operating points. Do not attempt to obtain reverse output by reversing the high and low points. The transmitter allows approximately five percent deviation. 5.2.4 Recall Factory TrimSensor Trim Fast Keys 3, 4, 1, 6 The Recall Factory TrimSensor Trim command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the sensor trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent zero trim of an absolute pressure unit or inaccurate pressure source. To restore sensor trim to as-shipped factory settings:
1. 2. 3. 4. From the Home screen, Select 3: Service Tools. Select 4: Routine Maintenance. Select 1: Sensor Calibration. Select 6: Recall Factory Trim. 5.2.5 Line Pressure Effect (Range 2 and Range 3) The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the Rosemount 3051 Range 2 and Range 3 pressure transmitters used in differential pressure applications where line pressure exceeds 2000 psi (138 bar). Zero Effect 0.1% of the upper range limit plus an additional 0.1% of upper range limit error for each 1000 psi (69 bar) of line pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar). Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (207 bar) for Ultra performance transmitter. Zero effect error calculation:
{0.05 + 0.1 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = 0.15% of the upper range limit Span Effect Refer to Line Pressure Effect on page 82. 5.2.6 Compensating for Line Pressure (Range 4 and Range 5) The Rosemount 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 pressure transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to optimize transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these applications. The 3051 Wireless differential pressure transmitters (Ranges 1, 2, and 3) do not require this procedure because optimization occurs in the sensor. 54 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Applying high static pressure to the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and Range 5 pressure transmitters causes a systematic shift in the output. This shift is linear with static pressure; correct it by performing the Sensor Trim procedure on page 53. The following specifications show the static pressure effect for the 3051 Wireless Range 4 and Range 5 transmitters used in differential pressure applications:
Zero Effect:
0.1% of the upper range limit per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 138 bar) For line pressures above 2000 psi (138 bar), the zero effect error is 0.2% of the upper range limit plus an additional 0.2% of upper range limit error for each 1000 psi (69 bar) of line pressure above 2000 psi (138 bar). Example: Line pressure is 3000 psi (3 kpsi). Zero effect error calculation:
{0.2 + 0.2 x [3 kpsi - 2 kpsi]} = 0.4% of the upper range limit Span Effect:
Correctable to 0.2% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to 250 bar) The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is -1.00% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for Range 4 transmitters, and -1.25% of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for Range 5 transmitters. Use the following example to compute corrected input values. Example A transmitter with model number 3051_CD4 will be used in a differential pressure application where the static line pressure is 1200 psi (83 bar). The transmitter output is ranged with 4 mA at 500 inH2O (1,2 bar) and 20 mA at 1500 inH2O (3,7 bar). To correct for systematic error caused by high static line pressure, first use the following formulas to determine corrected values for the low trim and high trim. Operation and Maintenance 55 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA LT = LRV + S x (LRV) x P Where:
LT =
LRV =
S =
P =
Corrected Low Trim Value Lower Range Value
(Span shift per specification) Static Line Pressure HT = URV + S x (URV) x P Where:
In this example:
HT =
URV =
S =
P =
URV =
LRV =
P =
S =
Corrected High Trim Value Upper Range Value
(Span shift per specification) Static Line Pressure 1500 inH2O (3.74 bar) 500 inH2O (1.25 bar) 1200 psi (82.74 bar) 0.01/1000 To calculate the low trim (LT) value:
LT =
LT =
500 + (0.01/1000)(500)(1200) 506 inH2O (1.26 bar) To calculate the high trim (HT) value:
HT =
HT =
1500 + (0.01/1000)(1500)(1200) 1518 inH2O (3.78 bar) Complete a 3051 Wireless sensor trim and enter the corrected values for low trim (LT) and high trim (HT), refer to Sensor Trim on page 53. Enter the corrected input values for low trim and high trim through the Field Communicator keypad after you apply the nominal value of pressure as the transmitter input. Note After sensor trimming 3051 Wireless Range 4 and 5 transmitters for high differential pressure applications, verify that the Lower and Upper Operating points are at nominal values using the Field Communicator. 56 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3 5.3.1 LCD Screen Messages Startup Screen Sequence The following screens will display when the Power Module is first connected to the Rosemount 3051 Wireless. X X X X X X X X X x x x x x x x x x All Segments On: used to visually determine if there are any bad segments on the LCD 3 0 5 1 W I r e l s Device Identification: used to determine Device Type. A b c d e f g h Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank P R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I PV Screen - process pressure Operation and Maintenance 57 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA S N S R 2 5. 0 0 d e g c SV Screen - sensor temperature value D E V 2 5. 2 5 d e g c TV Screen - device temperature value S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s P R C N T 7. 2 1 R A N G E a l e r t p r e s n t QV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminals Percent Range Screen - percent range reading Alert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are present 58 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3.2 Diagnostic Button Screen Sequence The following five screens will display when the device is operating properly and the Diagnostic Button has been pressed. A b c d e f g h Device Information - Tag: user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank i d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Device Identification: used to determine Device ID n e t w k 13 0 5 I D Diagnostic Button Screen 3:
assuming the device has the correct join key, this ID tells the user what network the device can connect with n e t w k O K Diagnostic Button Screen 4: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parents Operation and Maintenance 59 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s Diagnostic Button Screen 5:
voltage reading at the power supply terminals 5.3.3 Network Diagnostic Status Screens These screens display the network status of the device. Only one will be shown during the startup sequence or diagnostic sequence. n e t w k u n k n w n Diagnostic Button Screen 4.1: the device is attempting to start the radio n e t w k I N I T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.2: the device has just restarted n e t w k i d l e Diagnostic Button Screen 4.3: the device is starting to join the process 60 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 n e t w k D I S C N T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.4: the device is in a disconnected state and requires a Force Join command to join the network N E T w K S R C H N G Diagnostic Button Screen 4.5: the device is searching for the Network n e t w k N E G O T Diagnostic Button Screen 4.6: the device is attempting to join a network n e t w k c o n e c t Diagnostic Button Screen 4.7: the device is connected to the Network, but is in a Quarantined state Diagnostic Button Screen 4.8: the device is joined and operational, but is running with limited bandwidth for sending periodic data n e t w k L I M - O P Operation and Maintenance 61 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA n e t w k O K Diagnostic Button Screen 4.9: the device has joined a network and has been fully configured and has multiple parents 62 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 5.3.4 Device Diagnostic Screens The following screens will show the device diagnostics depending on the state of the device. D E V f A i l u r Device Information - Status: there is a critical error which may prevent the device from operating correctly. Check additional status screens for more information. P R E S S 5 8. 0 P S I PV Screen - process pressure value S N S R 2 5. 0 0 d e g c SV Screen - sensor temperature value D E V 2 5. 2 5 d e g c TV Screen - device temperature value Operation and Maintenance 63 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA S u p l y 7. 2 1 v o l t s P R C N T 7. 2 1 R A N G E a l e r t p r e s n t QV Screen - voltage reading at the power supply terminals Percent Range Screen - percent range reading Alert Screen - at least one alert is present - this screen will not display if no alerts are present A b c d e f g h Diagnostic Button Screen 1 - Tag:
user entered tag which is eight characters long - will not display if all characters are blank i d - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Diagnostic Button Screen 2: the devices identifier that is used to make up the HART long address -
the Smart Wireless Gateway may use this to help identify devices if no unique user tag is available 64 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 s u p l y f a i l u r s u p l y l o w r a d i o f a i l u r c o n f g f a i l u r Diagnostic Button Screen 7.1: the terminal voltage has dropped below level of operating limit. Replace the Power Module
(Part Number: 701PGNKF) Diagnostic Button Screen 7.2: the terminal voltage is below the recommended operating range -
if this is a battery operated device, the Power Module should be replaced - for line powered devices, the supply voltage should be increased Diagnostic Button Screen 8: the device may not be able to communicate with the radio or the radio has an internal error. In this state the device may still be operational and publishing HART data Diagnostic Button Screen 9.1:
configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that critical operation of the device may be affected -
check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be corrected Operation and Maintenance 65 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA c o n f g w a r n s n s r f a i l u r s n s r w a r n Diagnostic Button Screen 9.2:
configuration of the transmitter is invalid such that non-critical operation of the device may be affected - check the extended configuration status to identify which configuration item(s) need to be corrected Diagnostic Button Screen 10.1: a sensor attached to the transmitter has failed, and valid readings from that sensor are no longer possible - check the sensor and sensor wiring connections -
check additional status for more detailed information of the failure source Diagnostic Button Screen 10.2: a sensor attached to the transmitter is degraded, readings from that sensor may not be within accuracy specifications -
check the process, and sensor wiring connections - check additional status for more detailed information of the warning source Note Use the Rosemount Wireless LCD Part Number: 00753-9004-0002. 66 Operation and Maintenance Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Section 6 Troubleshooting Overview . page 67 Safety Messages . page 67 Disassembly Procedures . page 72 Reassembly procedures . page 75 6.1 Overview Table 6-2 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, consider using Section X.X on page XX to identify any potential problem 6.2 Safety Messages Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol (
). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol. Troubleshooting 67 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 6.2.1 Warnings (
) Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please review the approvals section of the 3051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation. Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 8 in. (20 cm) from all persons. The Power Module may be replaced in a hazardous area. The Power Module has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm and must be properly installed in the wireless device enclosure. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard. Polymer enclosure has surface resistivity greater than one gigaohm. Care must be taken during transportation to and from the point of installation to prevent a potential electrostatic charging hazard. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death. To avoid process leaks, only use the o-ring designed to seal with the corresponding flange adapter. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury. Avoid contact with the leads and the terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock. Table 6-1. Rosemount 3051 Wireless Device Status Information Device Status Description Recommended Action Electronics Failure An electronics error that could impact the device measement reading has occurred. Radio Failure The wireless radio has detected a failure or stopped communicating. Supply Voltage Failure The supply voltage is too low for the device to function properly. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Replace the Power Module 68 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Troubleshooting June 2012 Device Status Description Recommended Action Electronics Warning The device has detected an electronics error that does not currently impact the device measurement reading. Pressure has Exceeded Limits The sensor has exceeded the maximum measurement range. Electronics Temperature has Exceeded Limits The electronics temperature has exceeded the transmitter's maximum range. Supply Voltage Low Database Memory Warning The supply voltage is low and may soon affect broadcast updates. The device has failed to write to the database memory. Any data written during this time may have been lost. Configuration Error The device has detected a configuration error based on a change to the device. HI HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Check process for possible saturation condition Verify that the appropriate sensor was chosen for the application Reconfirm sensor configuration Reset the device Replace the sensor Verify environmental temperature is within the transmitters range Remote mount the transmitter away from process and environmental conditions Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Replace the Power Module Reset the device Reconfirm all configuration items in the device If logging dynamic data not needed, this advisory can be safely ignored If the condition persists, replace the electronics Click on details for more information Correct the parameter that has a configuration error Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Troubleshooting 69 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Device Status Description Recommended Action HI Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. LO LO Alarm The primary variable has surpassed the user defined limit. Button Stuck A buttons on the Electronics Board is detected as stuck in the active position. Simulation Active The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Verify that the process variable is within user specified limits Reconfirm the user defined alarm limit If not needed, disable this alert Check the buttons for obstructions Reset the device If the condition persists, replace the electronics Verify that simulation is no longer required Disable Simulation mode in Service Tools Reset the device 70 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Troubleshooting June 2012 Table 6-2. Rosemount 3051 Wireless Troubleshooting Symptom Transmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic LCD display is not functioning Recommended Actions Check test equipment Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage Verify applied pressure is within sensor limits Check test equipment (verify accuracy) Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg Verify transmitter is calibrated properly Verify pressure calculations for application Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off Reseat the LCD according to Installing the LCD Display on page 37 Verify that the LCD display is a wireless LCD Meter. An LCD from a wired device will not function in a wireless device. Rosemount part number: 00753-9004-0002 Verify that the LCD display mode is not disabled. Table 6-3. Wireless Network Troubleshooting Symptom Device not joining the network Short battery life Limited Bandwidth Error Recommended Actions Verify network ID and join key Wait longer (30 min.) Enable High Speed Operation on Smart Wireless Gateway Check Power Module Verify device is within range of at least one other device Verify network is in active network advertise Power Cycle device to try again Verify device is configured to join. Send the Force Join command to the device See troubleshooting section of Smart Wireless Gateway for more information Check that Power Always On mode is off Verify device is not installed in extreme temperatures Verfiy that device is not a network pinch point Check for excessive network rejoins due to poor connectivity Reduce the Update Rate on transmitter Increase communication paths by adding more wireless points Check that device has been online for at least an hour Check that device is not routing through a limited routing node Create a new network with an additional Smart Wireless Gateway Troubleshooting 71 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 6.3 6.3.1 Disassembly Procedures Removing from Service Follow these steps:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Follow all plant safety rules and procedures. Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service. Remove the transmitter from the process connection. a. The Rosemount 3051C Wireless transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation. Reference Figure X-X on page 43 for coplanar flange. b. The Rosemount 3051T Wireless transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process. Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in "Inline process connection' on page XX. Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms. Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water. Whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually inspect the PTFE o-rings. Replace the o-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged o-rings may be reused. 72 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Troubleshooting June 2012 6.3.2 Removing the electronics board The Wireless electronics board is located in the electronics compartment. To remove the assembly, perform the following procedure. 1. 2. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side. Remove the LCD Display, if applicable. To do this, hold in the two clips and pull outward. Note The electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for static-sensitive components. 3. 4. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly. Replace the LCD Display. This will help in removing the assembly. Note If an LCD is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces between the LCD and electronics board. 5. 6. Pull out the assembly to expose and locate the sensor module connector. Grasp the sensor module connector, squeeze the clips and pull upwards
(avoid pulling wires). Troubleshooting 73 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Figure 6-1. Sensor module connector view Wireless Housing 6.3.3 Removing the sensor from the housing Note To prevent damage to the senser module cable, disconnect it from the PlantWeb assembly before you remove the senser module from the housing. 1. 2. Loosen the housing rotation screw with a 3/32-inch hex wrench, then rotate back one full turn. Unscrew the housing from the senser module. 74 Troubleshooting Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Section 5: Troubleshooting June 2012 6.4 6.5 Reassembly procedures Reassembly procedures 1. 2. 3. 4. Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary. Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so, turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable. Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap. Turn the module clockwise into the housing. Important Make sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable become hung up and rotate with the housing. 5. 6. Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof requirements. Tighten the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-inch hex wrench. 6.5.1 Attaching electronics board 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach it to the electronics board. Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing. Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide gently on the connections. Tighten the captive mounting screws. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be engaged metal-to-metal to ensure a proper seal and to meet Explosion-Proof requirements. 6.5.2 Reassembling the 3051C process flange 1. Inspect the sensor module PTFE o-rings. Undamaged o-rings may be reused. Replace o-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear. See Safety Messages on page 67 for complete warning Troubleshooting 75 Section 6: Troubleshooting June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Note If you are replacing the o-rings, be careful not to scratch the o-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged o-rings. 2. Install the process connection. Possible options include:
a. Coplanar Process Flange:
Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange. b. Coplanar Process Flange with Flange Adapters:
Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. Hold the flange adapters and adapter o-rings in place while installing (in the desired of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using four 2.88-inch bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-inch bolts and two 1.75-inch bolts c. Manifold:
3. 4. Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-4 on page 6-76 for appropriate torque values. Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-4 on page 6-76. Table 6-4. Bolt installation torque values Bolt material Initial torque value Final torque value CS-ASTM-A445 Standard 316 SSTOption L4 ASTM-A-19 B7MOption L5 ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8MOption L8 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 150 in-lb. (17 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 150 in.-lb (17 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m) 300 in-lb. (34 N-m) 650 in-lb. (73 N-m) 300 in.-lb (34 N-m) Note If you replaced the PTFE sensor module o-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Note For Range 1 transmitters: after replacing o-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 F (85 C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 F (85 C) for two hours before calibration. See Safety Messages on page 67 for complete warning 76 Troubleshooting Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA LCD Display NSF drinking water approval ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety TIIS Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Product Certifications Standard I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I7 Drinking Water Approval Standard DW(11) Bolting Material Standard Austenitic 316 SST Bolts L4 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts L5 L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts Display and Interface Options Standard M5 Calibration Certificate Standard Q4 QG QP Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Configuration Buttons Standard DZ Software Configuration Standard C1 Gage Pressure Calibration Standard C3 Pressure Testing Expanded P1 Cleaning Process Area Expanded P2 Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate Calibration certification and tamper evident seal Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Gage Calibration (Model 3051CA4 only) Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Cleaning for Special Service Digital Zero Trim Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 98 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Standard Standard Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine Coplanar Flange Without Drain/Vent Ports 0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4) RC Flange with RC Flange Adapter, CS - SST Calibrate at Line Pressure (Specify Q48 on order for corresponding certificate) 1/2 -14 NPT flange adapter(s) 18 NPT Process Connections (No flange adapters) Table 1. 3051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitters Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. P3 Pressure Calibration Expanded P4 High Accuracy Standard P8(12) Flange Adapters Standard DF(13) D3 Vent/Drain Valves Expanded D7 RC1/4 RC1/2 Process Connection Expanded D9(14) Max Static Line Pressure Standard P9 Surface Finish Standard Q16 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Typical Model Number: 3051CD 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4$13857 780
(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material
(code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(2)Wireless output (code X) available in draft range 0 with only 316L SST isolating diaphragm (code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), housing code (code P), process flange (code 0), glass-filled o-ring (code A), and bolting option (code L4).
(3)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4)Requires 0 code in Materials of Construction for Alternate Process Connection.
(5)Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi Static Pressure.
(6)Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(7)Process Flange limited to Coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or Traditional (H2, H3, H7).
(8)Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 Adaptors.
(9)Not valid for optional codes DF and D9 for Adaptors.
(10)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied.
(11)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(12)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information.
(13)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection options S3, S4, S5, and S6. 4500 psig (310 bar) Static Pressure Limit (3051CD Ranges 25 only) Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data 99 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(14)Not available with Alternate Process Connection; DIN Flanges and Level Flanges. 100 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 A.5.3 Rosemount 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051T configurations:
Configuration 4-20 mA HART
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1) FOUNDATION fieldbus Profibus
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. Transmitter Output Code A F W See Options for more details on each configuration. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Additional Information Dimensional Drawings: page 93 Transmitter Type In-Line Pressure Transmitter Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 3051T Pressure Type Standard G A(1) Pressure Range Gage Absolute 3051TG(2) 3051TA
-14.7 to 30 psi (-1.0 to 2.1 bar)
-14.7 to 150 psi (-1.0 to 10.3 bar)
-14.7 to 800 psi (-1.0 to 55 bar)
-14.7 to 4000 psi (-1.0 to 276 bar)
-14.7 to 10000 psi (-1.0 to 689 bar) 0 to 30 psia (0 to 2.1 bar) 0 to 150 psia (0 to 10.3 bar) 0 to 800 psia (0 to 55 bar) 0 to 4000 psia (0 to 276 bar) 0 to 10000 psia (0 to 689 bar) Standard 1 2 3 4 5 Transmitter Output Standard X Process Connection Style Standard 2B 2C(3) Expanded 2F 61 Wireless Specifications and Reference Data 1/214 NPT Female G A DIN 16288 Male (Available in SST for Range 14 only) Coned and Threaded, Compatible with Autoclave Type F-250-C (Range 5 only) Non-threaded Instrument flange (Range 1-4 only) Standard Standard Standard Standard 101 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Process Connection Wetted Parts Material Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Conduit Entry Size Silicone Engineered polymer 316L SST Alloy C-276 316L SST Alloy C-276 User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART Isolating Diaphragm Standard 2(4) 3(4) Sensor Fill Fluid Standard 1 Housing Material Standard P No conduit entries Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard WP5 Options (Include with selected model number) Integral Assembly Standard S5(5) Diaphragm Seal Assemblies Standard S1(5) Mounting Bracket(6) Standard B4 Product Certifications Standard I1 I2 I3 I5 I7 Drinking Water Approval Standard DW(7) Calibration Certification Standard Q4 QG ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 seal NSF drinking water approval Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 102 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Digital Zero Trim Wireless SST Sensor Module Calibration Certification and tamper evident seal Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B Custom Software Configuration (Completed CDS 00806-0100-4001 required with order) Table 2. 3051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. QP Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Configuration Buttons Standard DZ Display and Interface Options Standard M5 LCD Display Wireless Sensor Module Standard WSM Software Configuration Standard C1(6) Pressure Testing Expanded P1 Cleaning Process Area(8) Expanded P2 P3 High Accuracy Standard P8(9) Surface Finish Standard Q16 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Typical Model Number:
(1)Wireless output (code X) available in absolute measurement type (Code A) with only range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm material
(code 2), silicone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(2)3051TG lower range limit varies with atmospheric pressure.
(3)Wireless output (code X) only available in G 1/2 A DIN 16288 Male process connection (code 2C) with range 1-4, 316L SST isolating diaphragm (code 2), silcone fill fluid (code 1), and housing code (code P).
(4)Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(5)Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(6)Panel mounting bolts are not supplied. Cleaning for Special Service Cleaning for <1 PPM Chlorine/Fluorine Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals 0.04% Accuracy to 5:1 turndown (Range 2-4) 3051T G 5 F 2A 2 1 A B4 Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data 103 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(7)Not available with Alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all Cast Alloy C-276 flanges, all plated CS flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges, assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code).
(8)Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5.
(9)Only available with Standard 3051. See specification section for more information. 104 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 A.5.4 Rosemount 3051CF Flowmeter Series This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051CF configurations:
Transmitter Output Code A Configuration 4-20 mA HART
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1) FOUNDATION fieldbus Profibus
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. F W See Options for more details on each configuration. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Differential Pressure Liquid Gas Steam Product Description Annubar Flowmeter Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 3051CFA Measurement Type Standard D Fluid Type Standard L G S Line Size Standard 020 025 030 035 040 050 060 070 080 100 120 Expanded 140 160 180 2-in. (50 mm) 21/2-in. (63.5 mm) 3-in. (80 mm) 31/2-in. (89 mm) 4-in. (100 mm) 5-in. (125 mm) 6-in. (150 mm) 7-in. (175 mm) 8-in. (200 mm) 10-in. (250 mm) 12-in. (300 mm) 14-in. (350 mm) 16-in. (400 mm) 18-in. (450 mm) Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard 105 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Range C from the Pipe I.D. table Range D from the Pipe I.D. table 20-in. (500 mm) 24-in. (600 mm) 30-in. (750 mm) 36-in. (900 mm) 42-in. (1066 mm) 48-in. (1210 mm) 60-in. (1520 mm) 72-in. (1820 mm) 78-in (1950 mm) 84-in. (2100 mm) 90-in. (2250 mm) 96-in (2400 mm) Range A from the Pipe I.D. table Range B from the Pipe I.D. table Range E from the Pipe I.D. table Non-standard Pipe I.D. Range or Line Sizes greater than 12 inches Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Expanded 200 240 300 360 420 480 600 720 780 840 900 960 Pipe I.D. Range Standard C D Expanded A B E Z Pipe Material / Mounting Assembly Material Standard C S 0 Expanded G N J Piping Orientation Standard H D U Annubar Type Standard P F Expanded L G M Horizontal Piping Vertical Piping with Downwards Flow Vertical Piping with Upwards Flow Carbon steel (A105) 316 Stainless Steel No Mounting (Customer Supplied) Chrome-Moly Grade F-11 Chrome-Moly Grade F-22 Chrome-Moly Grade F-91 Pak-Lok Flanged with opposite side support Flange-Lok Gear-Drive Flo-Tap Manual Flo-Tap Standard Standard Standard Standard 106 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Alloy C-276 316 Stainless Steel Sensor size 1 Line sizes 2-in. (50 mm) to 8-in. (200 mm) Sensor size 2 Line sizes 6-in. (150 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm) Sensor size 3 Line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm) Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Sensor Material Standard S Expanded H Sensor Size Standard 1 2 3 Mounting Type Standard T1 A1 A3 A6 D1 D3 D6 Expanded A9(1) AF(1) AT(1) R1 R3 R6 R9(1) RF(1) RT(1) Opposite Side Support or Packing Gland Standard 0 Compression or Threaded Connection 150# RF ANSI 300# RF ANSI 600# RF ANSI DN PN16 Flange DN PN40 Flange DN PN100 Flange 900# RF ANSI 1500# RF ANSI 2500 # RF ANSI 150# RTJ Flange 300# RTJ Flange 600# RTJ Flange 900# RTJ Flange 1500# RTJ Flange 2500# RTJ Flange No opposite side support or packing gland (Required for Pak-Lok and Flange-Lok models) Opposite Side Support Required for Flanged Models NPT Threaded Opposite Support Assembly Extended Tip Welded Opposite Support Assembly Extended Tip C D Expanded Standard Standard Standard Standard Packing Gland Required for Flo-Tap Models Packing Gland Material Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Stainless Steel Packing Gland / Cage Nipple Alloy C-276 Packing Gland / Cage Nipple J K L N R Isolation Valve for Flo-Tap Models Rod Material Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Packing Material PTFE PTFE Graphite Graphite Graphite Specifications and Reference Data 107 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Not Applicable or Customer Supplied Gate Valve, Carbon Steel Gate Valve, Stainless Steel Ball Valve, Carbon Steel Ball Valve, Stainless Steel Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Standard 0 Expanded 1 2 5 6 Temperature Measurement Standard T 0 Expanded R Transmitter Connection Platform Standard 3 5 7 Expanded 6 Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Direct -mount, 5-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Remote-mount NPT Connections (1/2-in. NPT) Integral RTD not available with Flanged model greater than class 600#
No Temperature Sensor Direct-mount, high temperature 5-valve Manifold not available with Flanged model greater than class 600 Remote-mount SW Connections (1/2-in.) Remote Thermowell and RTD Wireless 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) 8 Differential Pressure Range Standard 1 2 3 Transmitter Output Standard X Transmitter Housing Material Standard Engineered polymer P Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard WP5 1.6% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-yr. stability User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART No conduit entries Conduit Entry Size Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) 108 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Dye Penetrant Exam Radiographic Examination Flow Calibration (Average K) Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Extended Hydrostatic Testing Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Options (Include with selected model number) Pressure Testing Expanded P1(2) PX(2) Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Material Testing Expanded V1 Material Examination Expanded V2 Flow Calibration Expanded W1 Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 Surface Finish Standard RL RH Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8(3) Code Conformance(4) Expanded J2 J3 Materials Conformance Expanded J5(5) Country Certification Standard J6 Expanded J1 Canadian Registration Installed in Flanged Pipe Spool Section Expanded H3 H4 150# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule 300# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule Surface finish for Low Pipe Reynolds # in Gas & Steam Surface finish for High Pipe Reynolds # in Liquid Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection & Performance Certificate Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 European Pressure Directive (PED) NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard 109 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Mounting Hardware Shipped Separately Needle Valves, Stainless Steel OS&Y Gate Valve, Stainless Steel 600# Flanged Connection with Rosemount Standard Length and Schedule Variable Mounting Variable Tip Variable length Spool Section Needle Valves, Carbon Steel Needle Valves, Alloy C-276 OS&Y Gate Valve, Carbon Steel OS&Y Gate Valve, Alloy C-276 Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. H5 Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options Standard G2 G6 Expanded G1 G3 G5 G7 Special Shipment Standard Y1 Special Dimensions Expanded VM VT VS Product Certifications Standard I1 I2 I3 I5 I7 Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L2 Display and Interface Options Standard M5 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Manifold for Remote Mount Option Standard F2 F6 Expanded F1 F3 F5 F7 Configuration Buttons Standard DZ ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety 3-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 5-Valve Manifold, Carbon Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Digital Zero Trim LCD Display Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 110 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Table 3. Rosemount 3051CFA Annubar Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Typical Model Number: 3051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2 A A 1
(1)Available in remote mount applications only.
(2)Applies to assembled flowmeter only, mounting not tested.
(3)Instrument Connections for Remote Mount Options and Isolation Valves for Flo-tap Models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification.
(4)Not available with Transmitter Connection Platform 6.
(5)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Specifications and Reference Data 111 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Additional Information Dimensional Drawings: 3 316 SST Differential Pressure Conditioning Orifice Plate Orifice Plate Product Description Compact Flowmeter Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 3051CFC Measurement Type Standard D Primary Element Technology Standard C P Material Type Standard S Line Size Standard 005(1) 010(1) 015(1) 020 030 040 060 080 100 120 Primary Element Style Standard N Primary Element Type Standard 040 065(2) Temperature Measurement Standard 0 Expanded R Transmitter Connection Platform Standard 1/2-in. (15 mm) 1-in. (25 mm) 11/2-in. (40 mm) 2-in. (50 mm) 3-in. (80 mm) 4-in. (100 mm) 6-in. (150 mm) 8-in. (200 mm) 10-in. (250 mm) 12-in. (300 mm) 0.40 Beta Ratio 0.65 Beta Ratio Remote Thermowell and RTD No Temperature Sensor Square Edged Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 112 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Wireless No conduit entries Conduit Entry Size User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART Up to 1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve Manifold Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT Connections 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. 3 7 Differential Pressure Range Standard 1 2 3 Transmitter Output Standard X Transmitter Housing Material Standard P Engineered polymer Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard WP5 Options (Include with selected model number) Installation Accessories Standard AB AC AD DG DH DJ Expanded JB JR JS Remote Adapters Standard FE High Temperature Application Expanded HT Flow Calibration Expanded WC(3) WD(3) Pressure Testing ANSI Alignment Ring (150#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ANSI Alignment Ring (300#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) ANSI Alignment Ring (600#) (Only required for 10-in. (250 mm) and 12-in. (300mm) line sizes) DIN Alignment Ring (PN16) DIN Alignment Ring (PN40) DIN Alignment Ring (PN100) Flow Calibration Certification (3 point) Discharge Coefficient Verification (full 10 point) Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) JIS Alignment Ring (10K) JIS Alignment Ring (20K) JIS Alignment Ring (40K) Graphite Valve Packing (Tmax = 850 F) Flange Adapters 316 SST (1/2-in NPT) Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data 113 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 ANSI/ASME B31.8 Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection and Performance Certificate Table 4. Rosemount 3051CFC Compact Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Expanded P1 Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Code Conformance Expanded J2 J3 J4 Materials Conformance Expanded J5(4) Country Certification Expanded J1 Product Certifications Standard I1 I2 I3 I5 I7 Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L2 Display and Interface Options Standard M5 Manifold for Remote Mount Option Standard F2 F6 Configuration Buttons Standard DZ Typical Model Number: 3051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5
(1)Not available for Primary Element Technology C.
(2)For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element Type is 0.6 for Primary Element Technology Code C. ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety 3-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel 5-Valve Manifold, Stainless Steel Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 Canadian Registration Digitial Zero Trim LCD Display Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 114 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012
(3)Not available with Primary Element Technology P.
(4)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limitsapply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. Specifications and Reference Data 115 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Additional Information Dimensional Drawings: page 93 316 SST Differential Pressure 1/2-in. (15 mm) 1-in. (25 mm) 11/2-in. (40 mm) Product Description Integral Orifice Flowmeter Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 3051CFP Measurement Type Standard D Body Material Standard S Line Size Standard 005 010 015 Process Connection Standard T1 S1(1) P1 P2 D1 D2 D3 W1 W3 W6 Expanded A1 A3 A6 R1 R3 R6 Orifice Plate Material Standard NPT Female Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) Socket Weld Body (Not Available with Remote Thermowell and RTD) Pipe Ends: NPT Threaded Pipe ends: Beveled Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on Pipe Ends: Flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 116 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 316 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 0.066-in. (1.68 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.109-in. (2.77 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.160-in. (4.06 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.196-in. (4.98 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.260-in. (6.60 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.340-in. (8.64 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.150-in. (3.81 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.250-in. (6.35 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.345-in. (8.76 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.500-in. (12.70 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.630-in. (16.00 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.800-in. (20.32 mm) for 1-in. Pipe 0.295-in. (7.49 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.376-in. (9.55 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.512-in. (13.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 0.748-in. (19.00 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 1.022-in. (25.96 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe 1.184-in. (30.07 mm) for 1 1/2-in. Pipe Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. S Expanded H M Bore Size Option Standard 0066 0109 0160 0196 0260 0340 0150 0250 0345 0500 0630 0800 0295 0376 0512 0748 1022 1184 Expanded 0010 0014 0020 0034 Transmitter Connection Platform Standard D3 D5 R3 R5 Expanded D4 D6 D7 R4 R6 Differential Pressure Ranges Standard 1 2 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Direct-mount, High Temperature, 5-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, Alloy C-276 Direct-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST Direct-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 3-Valve Manifold, SST Remote-mount, 5-Valve Manifold, SST 0.010-in. (0.25 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.014-in. (0.36 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.020-in. (0.51 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0.034-in. (0.86 mm) for 1/2-in. Pipe 0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar) 0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar) Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard 117 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Standard Standard Standard Standard Wireless No conduit entries Conduit Entry Size 0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar) User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART up to 1.75% flow rate accuracy, 8:1 flow turndown, 5-year stability Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. 3 Transmitter Output Standard X Transmitter Housing Material Standard P Engineered polymer Transmitter Performance Class Standard 1 Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 PlantWeb Diagnostic Functionality Standard WP5 Options (Include with selected model number) Transmitter Body / Bolt Material Expanded GT Temperature Sensor Expanded RT(2) Optional Connection Standard G1 Pressure Testing Expanded P1(3) Special Cleaning Expanded P2 PA Material Testing Expanded V1 Material Examination Expanded V2 Flow Calibration Expanded WD(4) Cleaning for Special Services Cleaning per ASTM G93 Level D (Section 11.4) Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate DIN 19213 Transmitter Connection High Temperature (850 F / 454 C) Discharge Coefficient Verification Radiographic Examination Thermowell and RTD Dye Penetrant Exam 118 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Canadian Registration NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156 European Pressure Directive (PED) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1 ANSI/ASME B31.3 ANSI/ASME B31.8 Visual & Dimensional Inspection with Certificate Inspection and Performance Certificate Table 5. Rosemount 3051CFP Integral Orifice Flowmeter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Special Inspection Standard QC1 QC7 Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Code Conformance Expanded J2(5) J3(5) J4(5) Materials Conformance Expanded J5(6) Country Certification Standard J6 Expanded J1 Transmitter Calibration Certification Standard Q4 Product Certifications Standard I1 I2 I3 I5 I7 Sensor Fill Fluid and O-ring Options Standard L2 Display and Interface Options Standard M5 Configuration Buttons Standard DZ Typical Model Number: 3051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5
(1)To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.
(2)Thermowell Material is the same as the body material.
(3)Does not apply to Process Connection codes T1 and S1.
(4)Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.
(5)Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3. ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Calibration Certificate for Transmitter Graphite-Filled (PTFE) O-ring Digital Zero Trim LCD Display Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Specifications and Reference Data 119 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA
(6)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 120 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 A.5.5 Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 3051L configurations:
Configuration 4-20 mA HART
-3051
-Enhanced 3051(1) FOUNDATION fieldbus Profibus
(1)The enhanced 4-20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter Output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7. Transmitter Output Code A F W 3051L Level Transmitter See Options for more details on each configuration. Additional Information Dimensional Drawings: page 93 Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Model 3051L Pressure Range Standard Transmitter Type Level Transmitter 250 to 250 inH2O (0,6 to 0,6 bar) 1000 to 1000 inH2O (2,5 to 2,5 bar) 300 to 300 psi (20,7 to 20,7 bar) 2 3 4 Transmitter Output Standard Wireless X Process Connection Size, Material, Extension length (High Side) Standard Code G0(1) H0(1) J0 A0(1) A2(1) A4(1) Standard Code A6(1) B0(1) B2(1) Process Connection Size 2-in./DN 50/A 2-in./DN 50 2-in./DN 50 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 Material 316L SST Alloy C-276 Tantalum 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST Process Connection Size 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST Specifications and Reference Data Extension Length Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm Extension Length 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm Standard Standard Standard Standard 121 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. B4(1) B6(1) C0(1) C2(1) C4(1) C6(1) D0(1) D2(1) D4(1) D6(1) E0 F0 Mounting Flange Size, Rating, Material (High Side) 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount 2-in./50 mm 4-in./100 mm 6-in./150 mm Flush Mount Only Flush Mount Only 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 4-in./DN 100 3-in./DN 80 4-in./DN 100 316L SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Tantalum Tantalum Size Rating Material Standard M A B N C D P E X(1) F(1) G(1) Y(1) H(1) J(1) Z(1) L(1) Q R S V K(1) T(1) U(1) W(1) 7(1) Expanded 1 2 3 122 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. 4-in. 2-in. 3-in. DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100 4 in. ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 PN 40 per EN 1092-1 PN 10/16 per EN 1092-1 ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 600 10K per JIS B2238 20K per JIS B2238 40K per JIS B2238 CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS SST SST SST SST SST SST SST SST CS CS CS CS SST SST SST SST SST CS CS CS Specifications and Reference Data Standard Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. 4(1) 5(1) 6(1) 10K per JIS B2238 20K per JIS B2238 40K per JIS B2238 316 SST 316 SST 316 SST Seal Fill Fluid (High Side) Standard Specific Gravity Temperature Limits (Ambient Temperature of 70 F (21 C)) A C D H G N P 0.85 Syltherm XLT 1.07 Silicone 704 Silicone 200 0.93 Inert (Halocarbon) 1.85 Glycerine and 1.13 Water Neobee M-20 Propylene Glycol and Water 0.92 1.02 Low Pressure Side
-102 to 293 F (-75 to 145 C) 32 to 401 F (0 to 205 C)
-49 to 401 F (-45 to 205 C)
-49 to 320 F (-45 to 160 C) 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 C) 5 to 401 F (-15 to 205 C) 5 to 203 F (-15 to 95 C) Configuration Flange Adapter Diaphragm Material Sensor Fill Fluid Gage Differential Differential Differential Differential Tuned-System Assembly with Remote Seal SST SST SST SST SST None 316L SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 316L SST Alloy C-276 316L SST Silicone Silicone Silicone Inert (Halocarbon) Inert (Halocarbon) Silicone
(Requires Option Code S1) Standard 11(1) 21(1) 22(1) 2A(1) 2B(1) 31(1) O-ring Standard Glass-filled PTFE A Housing Material Standard Conduit Entry Size No conduit entries Engineered polymer P Wireless options (Requires option code X and Engineered Polymer housing code P) Wireless Transmit Rate, Operating Frequency and Protocol Standard WA3 Antenna and SmartPower Standard WP5 Options (Include with selected model number) Seal Assemblies User Configurable Transmit Rate, 2.4GHz WirelessHART Internal Antenna, Compatible with Green Power Module (I.S. Power Module Sold Separately) Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 123 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. Standard Assembled to One Rosemount 1199 Seal (Requires 1199M) S1(2) Product Certifications Standard ATEX Intrinsic Safety and Dust INMETRO Intrinsic Safety China Intrinsic Safety FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 IECEx Intrinsic Safety I1 I2 I3 I5 I7 Bolting Material Standard L4 L5 L6 L8 Display and Interface Options Standard Austenitic 316 SST Bolts ASTM A 193, Grade B7M bolts Alloy K-500 Bolts ASTM A 193 Class 2, Grade B8M Bolts Calibration Certificate Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate LCD Display M5 Calibration Certification Standard Q4 QP QG Material Traceability Certification Standard Q8 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Standard QZ Configuration Buttons Standard DZ Lower Housing Flushing Connection Options Digital Zero Trim Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report Ring Material Number Size (NPT) Standard F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 124 316 SST 316 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 316 SST 1 2 1 2 1 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/4-18 NPT 1/2-14 NPT Specifications and Reference Data Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 316 SST Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 Table 6. Rosemount 3051L Level Transmitter Ordering Information The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options () should be selected for best delivery. __The Expanded offering is subject to additional delivery lead time. F8 F9 F0 Typical Model Number: 3051L 2 A A0 D 21 A A F1
(1)Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(2)Assemble-to items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT 2 1 2 Specifications and Reference Data 125 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA A.6 Options Standard configuration Unless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows:
Engineering units Differential/Gage:
Absolute/3051TA:
Low Limit:
High Limit:
Output:
Flange type:
Flange material:
O-ring material:
Drain/vent:
LCD Display:
Alarm:
Software tag:
inH2O (Range 0, 1, 2, and 3) psi (Range 4 and 5) psi (all ranges) 0 (engineering units above) Upper range limit Linear Specified model code option Specified model code option Specified model code option Specified model code option Installed or none High
(Blank) Custom configuration If Option Code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the standard configuration parameters. Output Information Transmitter Information LCD Display Configuration Hardware Selectable Information Signal Selection Refer to the Rosemount Enhanced 3051 Configuration Data Sheet document number 00806-0100-4007. Tagging (3 options available) Standard SST hardware tag is wired to the transmitter. Tag character height is 0.125 in.
(3,18 mm), 56 characters maximum. Tag may be permanently stamped on transmitter nameplate upon request, 56 characters maximum. Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol.
- WirelessHART: 32 characters Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds Factory assembled to 3051C and 3051T transmitters. Refer to the following Product Data Sheet
(document number 00813-0100-4839 for Rosemount 304 and 00813-0100-4733 for Rosemount 305 and 306) for additional information. 126 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Other seals Refer to Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4016 for additional information. Output information Output range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include:
Pressure atm mbar bar inH20 inHg hPa mHg@0 C inH2O@4 C mmH2O mmHg mmH2O@4 C ftH20 inH20@60 F Psf g/cm2 kg/cm2 Pa kPa MPa kg/SqM ftH2O@4 C psi torr cmH20@4 C cmHG@0 C ftH20@60 F mH20@4 C Display and interface options Digital display option provides diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting and has 90 degree rotation capability for easy viewing. M5 Digital Display 2-Line, 5-Digit LCD for 4-20 mA HART Configuration buttons The 3051 Wireless transmitter comes with a Digital Zero installed with the LCD digital display. Bolts for flanges and adapters Options permit bolts for flanges and adapters to be obtained in various materials Standard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1 Specifications and Reference Data 127 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA L4 Austenitic 316 Stainless Steel Bolts L5 ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Bolts L6 Alloy K-500 Bolts Rosemount 3051C Coplanar Flange and 3051T bracket option B4 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting For use with the standard Coplanar flange configuration Bracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panel Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bolts Rosemount 3051C Traditional Flange bracket options B1 Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for mounting on 2-in. pipe Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B2 Bracket for Panel Mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for mounting transmitter on wall or panel Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B3 Flat Bracket for 2-in. Pipe Mounting For use with the traditional flange option Bracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe Carbon steel construction with carbon steel bolts Coated with polyurethane paint B7 B1 Bracket with SST Bolts Same bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts B8 B2 Bracket with SST Bolts Same bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts B9 B3 Bracket with SST Bolts Same bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts 128 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 BA Stainless Steel B1 Bracket with SST Bolts B1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts BC Stainless Steel B3 Bracket with SST Bolts B3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts Shipping weights Table 7. Transmitter weights without options Transmitter Add weight In lb (kg) 3051C 3051L 3051T 3.9 (1,8) Table 8 2.3 (1,0) Table 8. 3051L weights without options Flange Flush lb. (kg) 2-in. Ext. lb (kg) 4-in. Ext. lb (kg) 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) 2-in., 150 3-in., 150 4-in., 150 2-in., 300 3-in., 300 4-in., 300 2-in., 600 3-in., 600 DN 50/PN 40 DN 80/PN 40 DN 100/PN 10/16 12.5 (5,7) 17.5 (7,9) 23.5 (10,7) 17.5 (7,9) 22.5 (10,2) 32.5 (14,7) 15.3 (6,9) 25.2 (11,4) 13.8 (6,2) 19.5 (8,8) 17.8 (8,1) 19.5 (8,8) 26.5 (12,0) 24.5 (11,1) 35.5 (16,1) 20.5 (9,3) 28.5 (12,9) 25.5 (11,6) 37.5 (17,0) 21.5 (9,7) 30.5 (13,8) 26.5 (12,0) 39.5 (17,9) 27.2 (12,3) 28.2 (12,8) 29.2 (13,2) 21.5 (9,7) 19.8 (9,0) 22.5 (10,2) 20.8 (9,5) 26.2 (11,9) 23.5 (10,6) 21.8 (9,9) 27.2 (12,3) DN 100/PN 40 23.2 (10,5) 25.2 (11,5) Specifications and Reference Data 129 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Table 9. Transmitter options weights Code Option J, K, L, M J, K, L, M M5 M6 B4 B1 B2 B3 B7 B8 B9 BA, BC H2 H3 H4 H7 FC FD FA FB FP FQ Stainless Steel Housing(T) Stainless Steel Housing (C, L, H, P) LCD Display for Aluminum Housing LCD Display for SST Housing SST Mounting Bracket for Coplanar Flange Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange Mounting Bracket for Traditional Flange SST Bracket for Traditional Flange Traditional Flange Traditional Flange Traditional Flange Traditional Flange Level Flange3 in., 150 Level Flange3 in., 300 Level Flange2 in., 150 Level Flange2 in., 300 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 50, PN 40 DIN Level Flange, SST, DN 80, PN 40 Add lb (kg) 3.9 (1,8) 3.1 (1,4) 0.5 (0,2) 1.25 (0,6) 1.0 (0,5) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0) 2.4 (1,1) 2.7 (1,2) 2.6 (1,2) 2.5 (1,1) 10.8 (4,9) 14.3 (6,5) 10.7 (4,8) 14.0 (6,3) 8.3 (3,8) 13.7 (6,2) 130 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 A.7 Spare parts Model 3051C Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range) Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters. Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers. Silicone Fill Part Number 3 to 3/0.1 inH2O, Range 0 (includes Traditional SST flange and SST bolts). 316L SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 25 to 25 inH2O/0.5 inH2O, Range 1 250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O, Range 2 1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O, Range 3 300 to 300 psi/3 psi, Range 4 03031-1045-0002 03031-1045-0012 03031-1045-0013 03031-1045-0014 03031-1045-0016 03031-1045-0017 03031-1045-0022 03031-1045-0023 03031-1045-0024 03031-1045-0025 03031-1045-0026 03031-1045-0027 03031-1045-0032 03031-1045-0033 03031-1045-0034 03031-1045-0035 03031-1045-0036 03031-1045-0037 03031-1045-2042 03031-1045-2043 03031-1045-2044 03031-1045-2045 03031-1045-2046 03031-1045-2047 Specifications and Reference Data 131 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 2000 to 2000/20 psi, Range 5 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-2052 03031-1045-2053 03031-1045-2054 03031-1045-2055 03031-1045-2056 03031-1045-2057 Silicone fill Rosemount 3051C gage and differential sensor modules (Min. Span/Range) Part number Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters. Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers. Gage pressure range Differential pressure range Range 1 25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O 25 to 25 in H2O/0.5 in H2O 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Range 2 250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O 250 to 250 inH2O/2.5 inH2O 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Range 3 407 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O
-1000 to 1000 inH2O/10 inH2O 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 03031-1045-0012 03031-1045-0013 03031-1045-0014 03031-1045-0016 03031-1045-0017 03031-1045-0022 03031-1045-0023 03031-1045-0024 03031-1045-0025 03031-1045-0026 03031-1045-0027 03031-1045-0032 03031-1045-0033 03031-1045-0034 03031-1045-0035 03031-1045-0036 03031-1045-0037 132 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 14.2 to 300 psi/3 psi
-300 to 300 psi/3 psi Range 4 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Range 5 14.2 to 2000 psi/20 psi
-2000 to 2000psi/20 psi 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Tantalum Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Rosemount 3051C absolute sensor modules (Min. Span/Range) Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters. Note: Listed by Range and Process Isolator Order Numbers. Range 1, 0 to 30 psia/0.3 psia 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Range 2, 0 to 150/1.5 psia Range 3, 0 to 800 psia/8 psia 03031-1045-2042 03031-1045-2043 03031-1045-2044 03031-1045-2045 03031-1045-2046 03031-1045-2047 03031-1045-2052 03031-1045-2053 03031-1045-2054 03031-1045-2055 03031-1045-2056 03031-1045-2057 Silicone fill Part number 03031-2020-0012 03031-2020-0013 03031-2020-0014 03031-2020-0016 03031-2020-0017 03031-2020-0022 03031-2020-0023 03031-2020-0024 03031-2020-0026 03031-2020-0027 03031-2020-0032 03031-2020-0033 03031-2020-0034 03031-2020-0036 03031-2020-0037 Specifications and Reference Data 133 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Range 4, 0 to 400 psia/40 psia 316L SST Alloy C-276 Alloy 400 Gold-plated Alloy 400 Gold-plated 316 SST Rosemount 3051T Sensor Modules (Min. Span/Range) Note: One spare part is recommended for every 50 transmitters. Gage pressure range 0-0.3/30 psig 0-1.5/150 psig Range 1 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 2 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male 03031-2020-0042 03031-2020-0043 03031-2020-0044 03031-2020-0046 03031-2020-0047 Silicone Fill Part Number 03031-3112-3112 03031-3102-3112 03031-3132-3112 03031-3112-3113 03031-3102-3113 03031-3111-3112 03031-3101-3112 03031-3111-3113 03031-3101-3113 03031-3112-3122 03031-3102-3122 03031-3132-3122 03031-3112-3122 03031-3102-3122 03031-3132-3122 134 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 3 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range4 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female 0-8/800 psig 0-40/4,000 psig 03031-3112-3123 03031-3102-3123 03031-3111-3122 03031-3101-3122 03031-3111-3123 03031-3101-3123 03031-3112-3132 03031-3102-3132 03031-3132-3132 03031-3112-3133 03031-3102-3133 03031-3111-3132 03031-3101-3132 03031-3111-3133 03031-3101-3133 03031-3112-3142 03031-3102-3142 03031-3132-3142 03031-3112-3143 03031-3102-3143 03031-3111-3142 03031-3101-3142 03031-3111-3143 03031-3101-3143 Specifications and Reference Data 135 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Range 1 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 2 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/418 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 3 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/418 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female 136 Gage pressure range 0-0.3/30 psia 0-1.5/150 psia 0-8/800 psia 03031-3112-3012 03031-3102-1012 03031-3132-3012 03031-3112-3013 03031-3102-3013 03031-3111-3012 03031-3101-3012 03031-3111-3013 03031-3101-3013 03031-3112-3022 03031-3112-3022 03031-3132-3022 03031-3112-3023 03031-3102-3023 03031-3111-3022 03031-3101-3022 03031-3111-3023 03031-3101-3023 03031-3112-3032 03031-3102-3032 03031-3132-3032 03031-3112-3033 03031-3102-3033 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 0-40/4,000 psia 0-2000/10,000 psia SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 4 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female G1/2 A DIN 16288 Male Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Range 5 Aluminum, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Autoclave type F-250-C Aluminum, Alloy C-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female SST, 316L SST Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female Autoclave type F-250-C SST, AlloyC-276 Isolator 1/4 18 NPT Female 1/2 14 NPT Female 03031-3111-3032 03031-3101-3032 03031-3111-3033 03031-3101-3033 03031-3112-3042 03031-3102-3042 03031-3132-3042 03031-3112-3043 03031-3102-3043 03031-3111-3042 03031-3101-3042 03031-3111-3043 03031-3101-3043 03031-3112-3052 03031-3102-3052 03031-3122-3052 03031-3112-3053 03031-3102-3053 03031-3111-3052 03031-3101-3052 03031-3121-3052 03031-3111-3053 03031-3101-3053 Specifications and Reference Data 137 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA LCD Display Part number LCD Display for 3051 Wireless with Polymer Housing LCD Display for 3051 WirelessHART Electrical housings Standard - Polymer Engineered Polymer 03151-9010-0001 Part number Housing covers (include o-ring) Part number Flanges Part number Wireless Battery Cover - Polymer LCD Display Cover - Polymer Differential Coplanar Flange 316 SST Cast Alloy C-276 Cast Alloy 400 Nickel-plated carbon steel Gage/Absolute Coplanar Flange 316 SST Cast Alloy C-276 Cast Alloy 400 Nickel-plated carbon steel Coplanar flange alignment screw (package of 12) Traditional Flange 316 SST Cast Alloy C-276 Cast Alloy 400 316 SST - DIN Compliant (Option Code HJ) Level Flange, Vertical Mount 2 in., class 150, SST 2 in., class 300, SST 3 in., class 150, SST 3 in., class 300, SST DIN, DN 50, PN 40 DIN, DN 80, PN 40 03031-0388-0022 03031-0388-0023 03031-0388-0024 03031-0388-0025 03031-0388-1022 03031-0388-1023 03031-0388-1024 03031-0388-1025 03031-0309-0001 03031-0320-0002 03031-0320-0003 03031-0320-0004 03031-1350-0012 03031-0393-0221 03031-0393-0222 03031-0393-0231 03031-0393-0232 03031-0393-1002 03031-0393-1012 138 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Flange adapter kits (each kit contains parts for one DP transmitter or two GP/AP transmitters) Part number CS bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-Rings SST adapters Cast Alloy C-276 adapters Alloy 400 adapters Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters SST bolts, glass-filled PTFE O-Rings SST adapters Cast Alloy C-276 adapters Alloy 400 adapters Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters CS bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-Rings SST adapters Cast Alloy C-276 adapters Alloy 400 adapters Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters SST bolts, graphite-filled PTFE O-Rings SST adapters Cast Alloy C-276 adapters Alloy 400 adapters Nickel-plated carbon steel adapters 03031-1300-0002 03031-1300-0003 03031-1300-0004 03031-1300-0005 03031-1300-0012 03031-1300-0013 03031-1300-0014 03031-1300-0015 03031-1300-0102 03031-1300-0103 03031-1300-0104 03031-1300-0105 03031-1300-0112 03031-1300-0113 03031-1300-0114 03031-1300-0115 1/2 - 14 NPT Adapters 316 SST Cast Alloy C-276 Cast Alloy 400 Nickel-plated carbon steel Socket Weld Adapters 316 SST Cast Alloy C-276 Cast Alloy 400 Flange adapters Part number 02024-0069-0002 02024-0069-0003 02024-0069-0004 02024-0069-0005 02024-0069-1002 02024-0069-1003 02024-0069-1004 Specifications and Reference Data 139 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA O-Ring packages (package of 12) Part number Electronics housing, cover Electronics housing, module Process flange, glass-filled PTFE (White) Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE (Black) Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE (Light Brown) Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE (Black) 03031-0232-0001 03031-0233-0001 03031-0234-0001 03031-0234-0002 03031-0242-0001 03031-0242-0002 Bolt kits Part number COPLANAR FLANGE Flange Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 4) Carbon steel 316 SST ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Alloy K-500 Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {73mm (2.88 in.)} (set of 4) Carbon steel 316 SST ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Alloy K-500 TRADITIONAL FLANGE Differential Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 8) Carbon steel 316 SST ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Alloy K-500 Gage/Absolute Flange/Adapter Bolt Kit {44mm (1.75 in.)} (set of 6) Carbon steel 316 SST ASTM A 193, Grade B7M Alloy K-500 Conventional Manifold/Traditional Flange Bolts Carbon steel 316 SST Level Flange, Vertical Mount Bolt Kit (Set of 4) Carbon steel 316 SST 140 03031-0312-0001 03031-0312-0002 03031-0312-0003 03031-0312-0004 03031-0306-0001 03031-0306-0002 03031-0306-0003 03031-0306-0004 03031-0307-0001 03031-0307-0002 03031-0307-0003 03031-0307-0004 03031-0307-1001 03031-0307-1002 03031-0307-1003 03031-0307-1004 Use bolts supplied with manifold Use bolts supplied with manifold 03031-0395-0001 03031-0395-0002 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Drain/Vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter) Part number Differential Drain/Vent Kits 316 SST stem and seat kit Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit 316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit Gage/Absolute Drain/Vent Kits 316 SST stem and seat kit Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit Alloy K-500 stem and Alloy 400 seat kit 316 SST ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy 400/K-500 ceramic ball drain/vent kit 01151-0028-0022 01151-0028-0023 01151-0028-0024 03031-0378-0022 03031-0378-0023 03031-0378-0024 01151-0028-0012 01151-0028-0013 01151-0028-0014 03031-0378-0012 03031-0378-0013 03031-0378-0014 Mounting brackets Part number 3051C and 3051L Coplanar Flange Bracket kit B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts 3051T Inline Bracket Kit B4 bracket, SST, 2-in. pipe mount, SST bolts 3051C Traditional Flange Bracket Kits B1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts B2 bracket, panel mount, CS bolts B3 flat bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, CS bolts B7 (B1 bracket, SST bolts) B8 (B2 bracket, SST bolts) B9 (B3 bracket, SST bolts) BA (SST B1 bracket, SST bolts) BC (SST B3 bracket, SST bolts) 03031-0189-0003 03031-0189-0004 03031-0313-0001 03031-0313-0002 03031-0313-0003 03031-0313-0007 03031-0313-0008 03031-0313-0009 03031-0313-0011 03031-0313-0013 Specifications and Reference Data 141 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 142 Specifications and Reference Data Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Appendix B Product Certifications Wireless Certifications . page 143 B.1 B.1.1 Wireless Certifications Approved manufacturing locations Rosemount Inc. Chanhassen, Minnesota USA Fisher-Rosemount GmbH & Co. Wessling, Germany Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited Singapore Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD Beijing, China B.1.2 European directive information The EC declaration of conformity can be found on . The most recent revision can be found at www.rosemount.com. B.1.3 Telecommunication compliance All wireless devices require certification to ensure that they adhere to regulations regarding the use of the RF spectrum. Nearly every country requires this type of product certification. Emerson is working with governmental agencies around the world to supply fully compliant products and remove the risk of violating country directives or laws governing wireless device usage. B.1.4 FCC and IC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device must be installed to ensure a minimum antenna separation distance of 20 cm from all persons. B.1.5 Ordinary location certification for FM As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Product Certifications 143 Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA B.1.6 North American certifications Factory Mutual (FM) approvals I5 FM Intrinsically Safe, Non-Incendive, and Dust Ignition-proof. Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia llC Temperature Codes T4 (Tamb = -50 to 70 C) Non-Incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Dust Ignition-proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Ambient temperature limits: -50 to 85 C For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only. Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68 CSA - Canadian Standards Association I6 CSA Intrinsically Safe Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D. Temp Code T3C Enclosure Type 4X / IP66/68 For use with Rosemount power module P/N 00753-9220-0001 only. European certifications I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Certificate No.: BAS01ATEX1303X Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 C to 70 C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only. IP66/68 1180 II 1G B.1.7 B.1.8 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth. I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 04.0017X Ex ia IIC T4 (Ta = -60 C to 70 C) For use with Rosemount power module options 00753-9220-0001 only. IP66/68 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) The surface resistivity of the antenna is greater than one gigaohm. To avoid electrostatic charge build-up, it must not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth. 144 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 B.1.9 Japanese Certifications I4 TIIS Intrinsic Safety Ex ia IIC T4 Certificate Description TC18649 TC18650 TC18657 2051_CD/CG/LD/LG 2051_CA/TA/TG/LA 2051FA/SFC/SFP B.1.10 China (NEPSI) Certifications I3 China Intrinsic Safety Certificate No. (manufactured in Chanhassen, MN): GYJ081078 Certificate No. (manufactured in Beijing, China): GYJ06367 Certificate No. (manufactured in Singapore): GYJ06365 Ex ia IIC T4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (X) See appropriate certificate. Product Certifications 145 Appendix B: Product Certifications June 2012 Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA 146 Product Certifications Reference Manual 00809-0100-4100, Rev AA June 2012 Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Rosemount. the Rosemount logotype, and SMART FAMILY are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc. Coplanar is a trademark of Rosemount Inc. Halocarbon is a trademark of the Halocarbon Products Corporation.o. Fluorinert is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Corporation Syltherm 800 and D.C. 200 are registered trademarks of Dow Corning Corporation. Neobee M-20 is a registered trademark of PVO International, Inc. HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation. Foundation fieldbus is a registered trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. June 2012 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved. Emerson Process Management Rosemount Measurement 8200 Market Boulevard Chanhassen MN 55317 USA Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307 Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888 Fax +1 952 906 8889 Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. Argelsrieder Feld 3 82234 Wessling Germany Tel 49 (8153) 9390 Fax 49 (8153) 939172 Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461 T (65) 6777 8211 F (65) 6777 0947 Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.com Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., Limited No. 6 North Street, Hepingli, Dong Cheng District Beijing 100013, China T (86) (10) 6428 2233 F (86) (10) 6422 8586
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2012-10-05 | 2400 ~ 2483.5 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2012-10-05
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Rosemount Inc
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0017340878
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Measurement Division
|
||||
| 1 |
Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55344-3695
|
|||||
| 1 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@intertek.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
LW2
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
RMCT
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** O****** P****
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Project Test Engineer
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
612 8********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
612 8********
|
||||
| 1 |
M******@emerson.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless Pressure Transmitter | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
U****** S****
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
651-7********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
651-7********
|
||||
| 1 |
u******@intertek.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2400.00000000 | 2483.50000000 | 0.0060000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC